2010 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Seats and Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Features and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem,
the IMPALA Emblem, and the name IMPALA
are registered trademarks of General Motors.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
This manual describes features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle either because they
are options that you did not purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please
refer to the purchase documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found
on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name "General Motors of Canada
Limited" for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list
of what is in the manual and the page number where it
can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25896384 B Second Printing
©2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do
this,” or “Do not let this
happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information relating
to a specific component, control, message, gauge,
or indicator.
WARNING:
{
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
. : Fuel Gauge
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1 In Brief
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4‑20.
L. Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3.
M. Cruise Control on page 4‑6.
N. Hood Release on page 6‑13.
O. Horn on page 4‑3.
B. Remote Trunk Release Button. See Trunk on
page 3‑12
.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4‑4.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4‑22.
E. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
F. Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑37.
G. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑25.
H. Audio System(s) on page 4‑57.
P. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑86
(If Equipped).
Q. Ignition Positions on page 3‑20.
R. Climate Control System on page 4‑16.
S. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑15.
I. Exterior Lamps on page 4‑9.
T. Center Console Shift Lever (If Equipped).
See Shifting Into Park on page 3‑26.
J. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑11.
U. Glove Box on page 3‑39.
K. Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑7
(If Equipped).
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Drive Information
Press Q to lock all doors.
This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.
Press and hold V for approximately one second to
open the trunk.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Press L and release to locate the vehicle.
Press L and hold for more than two seconds to sound
the panic alarm.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and
unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away
from the vehicle.
Press L again to cancel the panic alarm.
See Keys on page 3‑3 and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4.
Press K to unlock the
driver door. Press again
within five seconds to
unlock all remaining
doors.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Vehicle Start
Door Locks
With this feature the engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.
Manual Locks
From outside the vehicle, use the key in the door or the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock or
unlock the vehicle. From the inside, pull up or push
down on the manual door lock knobs.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press Q.
See Door Locks on page 3‑9.
3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and
Power Door Locks
hold / until the turn signal lamps flash.
Power door lock switches are located on the front doors
near the handle.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
The doors will be locked and the climate control system
may come on.
Q : Press the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.
K : Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors.
For more information, see:
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat
the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start
can be extended only once.
.
Power Door Locks on page 3‑10.
.
Delayed Locking on page 3‑10.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start:
Trunk Release
In addition to the trunk release button on the RKE
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and hold / until the parking lamps turn off.
transmitter, there is a remote release V button
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
.
For more information see Trunk on page 3‑12.
Turn the ignition on and then back off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑7.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats
On vehicles with power windows, the switches are on
the driver door armrest. Each passenger door has a
switch that controls only that window.
1. Lift the bar under the seat to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release
the bar.
Press the front of the switch to the first position to open
the window. Pull the switch up to close it.
Try to move the seat to be sure it is locked in place.
See Manual Seats on page 2‑4.
For more information, see Power Windows on
page 3‑15
.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
Power Reclining Seatback
Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
control forward or rearward.
To raise or recline the seatback, tilt the top of the
control forward or rearward.
Raise or lower the front or rear of the seat cushion by
moving the front or rear of the control up or down.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑7.
See Power Seats on page 2‑5.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Second Row Seats
On vehicles with the Flip and Fold feature, the bottom
seat cushions can be flipped forward and the seatback
folded down to create an extended cargo area.
The vehicle also has an under seat storage area.
See Split Folding Rear Seat on page 2‑10 for more
information.
Head Restraint Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants
are installed and adjusted properly.
For more information see Head Restraints on
page 2‑2
.
Increase or decrease the lumbar support by repeatedly
pushing down or pulling up on the lever.
See Manual Lumbar on page 2‑6.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbags, seat‐side impact airbags, and
roof‐rail airbags are not affected by this.
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the instrument panel when the vehicle is started.
Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
United States
Canada
.
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2‑13.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑68 for
important information.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2‑18.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑27.
.
Lap Belt on page 2‑32.
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑45
.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Mirror
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Vehicles with a manual rearview mirror can be adjusted
by holding the mirror in the center to move it for a
clearer view behind the vehicle. Adjust the mirror to
avoid glare from the headlamps behind. Pull the lever,
located at the bottom of the mirror for nighttime use.
Return the lever to its original position for the day
position.
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door
armrest.
Vehicles with an automatic dimming rearview mirror will
automatically adjust to reduce the glare of lights from
behind the vehicle. See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror on page 3‑31.
Press the left or right side of the selector located
beneath the control pad to adjust the driver or
passenger mirror. Then press the control pad
to move the mirror to the desired direction.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamp
The center mounted dome lamp overhead comes on
when a door is opened. This lamp can also be turned
on by turning the instrument panel brightness control
clockwise.
Reading Lamps
The vehicle has reading lamps that also act as the
dome lamp. Press the button near each lamp to turn
them on and off.
Map Lamps
The vehicle has map lamps on the rearview mirror.
Push the button near each lamp to turn the map lamps
on and off.
The tilt wheel lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
For more information on interior lighting, see:
.
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑11.
To adjust the steering wheel:
.
Courtesy Lamps on page 4‑12.
1. Hold the wheel and pull the lever towards you.
.
Delayed Entry Lighting on page 4‑12.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
.
Delayed Exit Lighting on page 4‑13.
.
3. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in
place.
Parade Dimming on page 4‑13.
See Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO: Automatic operation of the headlamps and other
exterior lamps at normal brightness.
Exterior Lighting
; : Turns on the the parking lamps and taillamps.
2 : Turns on the headlamps and other exterior lamps.
# (If Equipped): Turns on the fog lamps.
For more information, see:
.
Exterior Lamps on page 4‑9.
.
Fog Lamps on page 4‑11.
The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering wheel.
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic
Headlamp System on page 4‑11.
P : Briefly turn to this position to manually turn
the automatic lamp control and Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) off or on. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, the off position only works when the
vehicle is shifted into the P (Park) position.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 : Turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down
for less frequent wipes.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
6 : Slow wipes.
? : Fast wipes.
Windshield Washer
At the top of the multifunction lever, there is a paddle
with L on it. Push the paddle to spray washer fluid on
the windshield.
See Windshield Wipers on page 4‑5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4‑6.
The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.
9 : Turns the windshield wipers off.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
This vehicle may have a dual or single climate control
system. The heating, cooling, defrost, defog and
ventilation can be controlled with either of these
systems.
Single Zone
E. Air Delivery Mode Control
F. Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control
B. Outside Air
C. Temperature Control G. Rear Window Defogger
D. Recirculation
Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls
See Climate Control System on page 4‑16.
A. Fan Control
B. Outside Air
C. Recirculation
E. Air Conditioning
F. Driver and Passenger
Heated Seats
G. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
D. Air Delivery
Mode Control
H. Rear Window Defogger
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 : Press to display additional text information related to
the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3 or WMA
song. If information is available during XM, CD, MP3 or
WMA playback, the song title information displays on
the top line of the display and artist information displays
on the bottom line. When information is not available,
“No Info” displays.
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Audio System(s) on page 4‑57.
Storing a Favorite Station
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
For radios with a FAV button, a maximum of 36 stations
can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located
below the radio station frequency tabs and by using
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go through up to
six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations
available per page. Each page of favorites can contain
any combination of AM, FM, or XM stations.
Radio with CD (MP3)
O : Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
For radios without a FAV button, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed
on the six numbered buttons.
BAND: Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM™,
if equipped.
f : Select radio stations.
See Radio(s) on page 4‑60.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Clock
Satellite Radio
To set the time and date for the Radio with CD (MP3):
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located below any one of the
tabs that you want to change.
A fee is required to receive the XM service.
For more information, refer to:
4. Increase or decrease the time or date by
.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
turning f clockwise or counterclockwise.
.
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your
specific audio system, see Setting the Clock on
See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under Radio(s) on
page 4‑60
.
page 4‑58
.
Portable Audio Devices
This vehicle may have an auxiliary input jack, located
on the audio faceplate. External devices such as iPod®,
MP3 players, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary
input jack using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” under Radio(s) on
page 4‑60
.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SRCE : Press to choose between the radio, CD, and
auxiliary input jack.
Steering Wheel Controls
If equipped, these
+ e − e : Increases or decreases volume.
controls are located on
the right side of the
steering wheel.
¨ : Press to go to the next radio station while in AM,
FM, or XM™. Press to go to the next track or chapter
while sourced to the CD.
For more information, see Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 4‑86.
Bluetooth®
For vehicles with an in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle’s
audio system and controls.
w : Press to go to the next radio station stored as a
The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used
in the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions.
For more information visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
favorite, or the next track if a CD is playing.
b g : Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press
again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer than
two seconds to interact with the OnStar® or Bluetooth
systems, if equipped.
For more information, see Bluetooth® on page 4‑75.
c x : Press to go to the previous radio station stored
as a favorite, the next track if a CD is playing, to reject
an incoming call, or end a current call.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control
Power Outlets
The vehicle has three 12‐volt outlets to use with
electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left
side of the steering wheel.
On vehicles with a center console, one outlet is located
inside the center floor console and two outlets are
located at the front of the console bin under the
instrument panel. Lift the cover to access the outlet.
On vehicles without a center console, two are located
under the climate controls and another outlet for the
rear seat passengers is at the rear of the center front
seat. Remove the cover to access the outlets.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑15.
J: On/Off.
RES+ : Press to resume or accelerate speed.
SET− : Press to set or decrease speed.
[ : Press to cancel cruise control.
For more information, see Cruise Control on page 4‑6.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Performance and Maintenance
The Electronic Stability Control system assists with
directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. The system turns on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle may have a traction control system limits
wheel spin. The system turns on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.
.
To turn off both traction control and Electronic
Stability Control, press and hold 5 on the
.
For vehicles with traction control, press and
instrument panel until F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message displays. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44.
release i on the instrument panel to turn off
traction control. F illuminates and the appropriate
DIC message displays. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑44.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on both
systems.
.
For vehicles with traction control and electronic
For more information, see Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) on page 5‑5.
stability control, press and release 5 on the
instrument panel to turn off traction control. F
illuminates and the appropriate DIC message
displays. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑44
.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on
traction control.
For more information, see Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 5‑7.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about low tire
pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly tire
maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS).
The Tire Pressure
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑60 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑62.
Monitor alerts you when
a significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message
when it is necessary to change the engine oil and
filter. The oil life system should be reset to 100%
only following an oil change.
If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the tire loading information label located on
the driver side center pillar (B pillar). See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑19. The warning light will remain
on until the tire pressure is corrected.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC
for more than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting
low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Roadside Assistance Program
U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872)
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
Vehicles that have the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K) or
the 3.9L V6 engine (VIN Code M) have a yellow fuel
cap and can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol
fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 6‑8. In all other engines, use
only the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline
Octane on page 6‑6.
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program.
This program provides technically trained advisors
who are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year,
minor repair information or towing arrangements.
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location
to get you the help you need.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
.
When road and weather conditions are
Online Owner Center
appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped.
.
Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a single trip.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC
Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near
the size.
.
Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation and Hands‐Free
Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar
services are available on all vehicles. For more
information see the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1‐888‐466‐7827)
or TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to speak with
an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.
For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to the
vehicle to see if you need help.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services
are available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you to a specially
trained OnStar advisor to verify your account
information and to answer questions.
] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.
X : Push this button for hands‐free, voice‐activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar hands-free calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑86
for more information.
OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is pressed,
or if the airbags or ACR system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle's GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding the
crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction
from which the vehicle was hit). When the virtual
advisor feature of OnStar hands-free calling is used, the
vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle's GPS location
so they can provide services where it is located.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more
information.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request a
vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2 Seats and Restraint System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . 2-66
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . 2-73
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
WARNING:
{
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a
crash.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Front Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
WARNING:
{
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On vehicles with power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of the
seats. To adjust the seat:
Power Seats
.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
.
Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
.
Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
The driver seat may have power reclining seatbacks.
See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining
Seatbacks on page 2‑7 for more information.
Driver Seat with Manual Lumbar, Power Seat Control,
and Power Recline shown
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
On vehicles with this
feature, the buttons that
control the driver and
front passenger heated
seats are located on the
climate control panel.
See Climate Control
System on page 4‑16.
Press the button to turn on the seat at the high setting.
Both lights below the heated seat symbol are lit. Press
the button a second time to turn the seat to the low
setting. Only the bottom light is lit. Press the button a
third time to turn the heated seat off.
Driver Seat with Manual Lumbar shown
On vehicles with manual lumbar, the lever is located
on the outboard side of the driver seat near the front
of the seat cushion. Lift up or push down on the lever
repeatedly to increase or decrease lumbar support.
The heated seat feature must be turned on again each
time the ignition is turned off and back on.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING:
{
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Passenger Seat with Manual Recline and Power Seat
Control shown
WARNING:
{
To operate a manual reclining seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
Power Reclining Seatback
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
Driver Seat with Manual Lumbar, Power Seat Control,
and Power Recline shown
The driver seat may have a power reclining seatback.
The control used to operate it is located on the outboard
side of the seat cushion rear of the horizontal power
seat control.
.
Press the control rearward to recline the seatback.
.
Press the control forward to raise the seatback.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Seat
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
Flip and Fold Feature
On vehicles with this feature, you can flip the bottom
seat cushion(s) forward and fold the seatback(s) down
to create an extended flat cargo area.
To use this feature:
1. Make sure the front seats are not reclined.
If they are, the seat cushion will not flip forward
completely.
The vehicle may have a front center seat. There are
cupholders on the underside of the seat cushion. To use
them, flip the seat cushion forward. The seat can also
be used as a storage area by lowering the seatback.
See Center Console Storage on page 3‑39
.
The seatback doubles as an armrest for the driver or
front passenger when the center seat is unoccupied.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lower the seatback(s)
by pulling forward on
the tab located on the
outboard side of the
seatback(s).
2. Flip the bottom seat cushion forward by pulling up
on the tab located in the center of the seat cushion
where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seats to the normal position:
2. Ensure that the safety belts are properly stowed
over the seatback in all three positions.
3. Flip the bottom seat cushion back into place.
Push firmly on the seat cushion to make sure
it is secure.
WARNING:
{
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
When the seat is not in use, the seatback should be
placed in an upright, locked position, and the seat
cushion should be in the down position.
Under Seat Storage
The vehicle also has an under seat storage area.
1. Raise the seatback up and make sure it latches.
To access the storage area, lift up on the tab located in
the center of the bottom seat cushion where the seat
cushion meets the seatback. See Rear Storage Area on
page 3‑39 for more information.
WARNING:
{
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
WARNING:
{
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people
to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use safety
belts properly. It also describes some things not to do
with safety belts.
WARNING:
{
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑23
for additional information.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And
you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2‑34 or Infants
and Young Children on page 2‑37. Follow those rules
for everyone's protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
except for the center front passenger position, if your
vehicle has one, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt on
page 2‑32 for more information.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the
Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle,
check if the correct buckle is being used.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 2‑33
.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in
the right front seating position may affect the
passenger sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑68.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later
in this section for instructions on use and important
safety information.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage
can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap
belt on smaller occupants.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has shoulder belt height adjusters for the
driver and right front passenger positions.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can
help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the height
adjuster and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash on page 2‑76.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides for each outboard passenger position in the
rear seat. If not, they are available through your dealer.
The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for
older children who have outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed and properly adjusted, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck
and head.
You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to make
sure it has locked into position.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt:
1. Pull the guide out from the pocket on the edge of
the seatback.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure that
the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide into the
storage pocket on the edge of the seatback.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Lap Belt
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
This section is only for the lap belt. To learn how to
wear a lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 2‑27
.
The vehicle may have a center seating position. When
you sit in the center front seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position, and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take
the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat
it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 2‑33
.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer's instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
.
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2‑27 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
.
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
length of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
WARNING:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
{
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑27.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts
properly.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its
airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants
and young children ride in vehicles, they should have
the protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING:
{
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person's arms. An infant should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front seat. Secure a
rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
WARNING:
{
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer's instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
WARNING:
{
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of the
infant.
A young child's hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child's body with
the harness.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
WARNING:
{
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2‑45 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
WARNING:
{
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
WARNING: (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑68
for additional information.
WARNING:
{
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child
restraint in the center front seat. It is always
better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
(Continued)
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and also
the instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed to
make installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH
system.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether always
to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and
that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child restraint.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
Rear Seat
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 2‑43 for
additional information.
The top tether anchors are located under the covers
on the rear seatback filler panel behind each head
restraint. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
WARNING:
{
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to
secure the restraint, following the instructions
that came with the child restraint and the
instructions in this manual.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts
to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
WARNING:
{
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could be
injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries during a crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the
seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
WARNING:
{
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint
has been installed.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
If the position you
are using has a fixed
headrest and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
head restraint.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Push on the depression at the rear of the
cover and swing the lid open to expose the
top tether anchor.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the position you are
using has a fixed
headrest and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over
the head restraint.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the safety belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑45 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in
the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑45 for top tether anchor locations.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 2‑43.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑45 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed
the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
WARNING:
{
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child
restraint in the center front seat. It is always
better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
WARNING: (Continued)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2‑43.
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑68 and Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 4‑25 for more information,
including important safety information.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑68
for additional information.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
(Continued)
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑45 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑45 for top tether anchor locations.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
page 4‑25
.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑68 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed
the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may
be helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from
the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver and passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑63
.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail
airbags.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system
is designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on
page 2‑34 or Infants and Young Children on
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑24 for
more information.
page 2‑37
.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger side.
The driver's frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling
above the side windows.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
WARNING:
{
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce
the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or
right front passenger's head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle
with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page 2‑58
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system's
designed threshold level. The threshold level can
vary with specific vehicle design.
.
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object that does not
deform.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rollovers
or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is
intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is
struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either
side of the vehicle is struck.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
.
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair
costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined
by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and
how quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and severity of the side
impact.
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment
occurs.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant seating positions.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑63 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
WARNING:
{
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated
for some time after they deploy. Some components
of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑65.
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able
to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the interior
lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the
controls for those features.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
WARNING:
{
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts.
The service manual for your vehicle covers
the need to replace other parts.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8‑17 and Event Data Recorders on
page 8‑18
.
.
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag, seat‐mounted side impact airbags,
and roof‐rail airbags are not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel
when the vehicle is started.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
United States
Canada
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON or
the word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑25.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
WARNING:
{
.
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an infant is present in
a child restraint.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑25.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is
turned off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger seat. When
the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag
to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is active.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating
posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
WARNING:
{
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 2‑54.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑24
for more information, including important safety
information.
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and
restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable,
to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on
page 2‑2
.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off
the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending upon
the child's seating posture and body build. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑74 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
.
The passenger sensing system may turn off the
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into the
seat. If this happens, the off indicator will be lit,
and the airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel will also be lit.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
.
Liquid pooled on the seat that has not soaked
in may make it more likely that the passenger
sensing system will enable (turn on) the passenger
airbag while a child restraint or child occupant is on
the seat. If the passenger airbag is turned on, the
on indicator will be lit.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry the seat
immediately. If the airbag readiness light is lit, do not
install a child restraint or allow anyone to occupy the
seat. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑24 for
important safety information.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing the vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat.
If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat.
page 8‑16
.
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat
or between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper operation
of the passenger sensing system.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change about
the vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
System on page 2‑68
.
If you have any questions, call Customer
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle's
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, front sensors, side impact sensors,
or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the
airbag system.
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this
will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger's
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
In addition, your dealer and the service manual have
information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4‑24 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑65. See your dealer for
service.
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can
rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed,
get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑23 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6‑89
.
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
WARNING:
{
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑24
.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during
any crash may have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 Features and Controls
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . 3-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Automatic Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 Features and Controls
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Sunglasses Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Rear Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With Three Round LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
WARNING:
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and the
driver's door.
See your dealer if a replacement key or additional key
is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑7 for more information.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
.
Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
.
Check the transmitter's battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
.
If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer or a qualified technician for service.
With Remote Start Shown,
Without Remote Start
Similar
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 3‑7 for additional information.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking
lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred.
If enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps when Q is
pressed again within five seconds. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4‑51 for additional information.
Pressing " on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft‐deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 3‑17
.
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for about
one second to unlock the trunk. The transmission must
be in P (Park).
Pressing Q may arm the content theft‐deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3‑17.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds three times. Press and hold L for
more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm.
The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds
repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm turns off when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or L is pressed again.
The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm
to work.
" (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door. If " is
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors
unlock. The interior lamps come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled
through the DIC, the parking lamps flash twice to
indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4‑51
.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased and programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter is programmed
to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters must also be
programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters no longer
work once the new transmitter is programmed. Each
vehicle can have up to eight transmitters programmed
to it. See “Remote Key” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 4‑37.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for additional
information.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object,
such as a flat head screwdriver.
.
Carefully insert the tool into the notch located
along the parting line of the transmitter.
Do not insert the tool too far. Stop as soon
as resistance is felt.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from
your body could damage the transmitter.
.
Twist the tool until the transmitter is separated.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
It may also start the vehicle's heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger. When the remote
start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system, it will automatically regulate the
inside temperature. Normal operation of these systems
will return after the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release Q, then immediately press
and hold / for two to four seconds or until the
vehicle's turn signal lamps flash. The doors
will lock.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on
and remain on while the engine is running.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine
running time, or one start with a time extension.
The first start must expire or be canceled to get
two separate 10 minute starts.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range of
operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is
still running, to extend the engine running time by
10 minutes from the time you repeat the steps for
remote starting. The remote start running time can be
extended one time and only after the first remote start.
start procedure can be used again. See Ignition
Positions on page 3‑20 for information regarding
the ignition positions on your vehicle.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:
.
The remote start system is disabled through
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
the DIC.
.
The vehicle's key is in the ignition.
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle's
key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to
ON/RUN.
.
The vehicle's hood is open.
.
The hazard warning flashers are on.
.
The check engine light is on. See Malfunction
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following.
Indicator Lamp on page 4‑31.
.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
.
The oil pressure is low.
and release the remote start button.
.
The content theft-deterrent alarm has been
activated.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
.
Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
.
Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time
extension, have already been provided for that
ignition cycle.
and then back to LOCK/OFF.
After the engine has been started two times, or one
time with a time extension, the vehicle's ignition must
be turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doors and Locks
WARNING: (Continued)
Door Locks
.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
WARNING:
{
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
.
From the outside, use the key in the driver door or use
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock and
unlock the vehicle. From the inside, use the manual or
power door locks.
Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. The chance of being thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if
the doors are not locked. So, all passengers
should wear safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked whenever the vehicle
is driven.
To lock or unlock the driver side door from the outside
with the key, insert the key and turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise.
To lock or unlock the door from the inside, push or pull
the manual lock knob.
.
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
(Continued)
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
This feature allows the driver to delay the actual locking
of the doors. When the driver power door lock switch
is pressed with the key removed from the ignition, and
the driver door open, a chime will sound three times
to signal that the delayed locking system is active.
When all doors have been closed, the doors will lock
automatically after several seconds. If any door is
opened before this, the timer will reset itself once
all the doors have been closed again.
A power door lock switch
is located on both front
doors next to the door
handle.
Pressing the driver or passenger power door lock switch
again or the RKE transmitter button will override this
feature.
Personal Choice Programming
Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors or press
the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.
The delayed locking feature can be turned on or off,
using the Driver Information Center (DIC) to program
this feature. See “DELAY DOOR LOCK” under DIC
Vehicle Customization on page 4‑51.
If the vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent
system and it is armed, the power door lock switches
will be disabled. You must use the RKE transmitter or
the key to unlock the doors when the system is armed.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3‑17.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist in finding the lock, the vehicle has the
following:
Automatic Door Lock
The doors will automatically lock when the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park). The automatic door locking
feature cannot be disabled.
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
The vehicle is programmed so that when the shift lever
is moved into P (Park) all doors will unlock.
With the vehicle stopped and the engine running,
door unlocking can be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
These prompts allow the driver to choose various
unlock settings. For programming information,
see DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4‑51.
To use the lock:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
Rear Door Security Locks
Rear door security locks prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the inside.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door security locks are located on the inside
edge of each rear door. The rear doors must be opened
to access them.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the
following:
Trunk
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one,
the power door lock switch, or by lifting the rear
door manual lock.
WARNING:
{
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate,
or trunk/hatch open:
Lockout Protection
.
Close all of the windows.
This feature helps prevent you from locking the doors
while the key is in the ignition. Always remember to take
your key with you when exiting the vehicle.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
If the lock switch is pressed on the door that is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the open door will unlock. A chime sounds
continuously until the driver door is closed.
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑29.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk Release
To open the trunk from the outside, press the trunk
release button on the RKE transmitter, if equipped.
Remote Trunk Release
G (Remote Trunk Release): Press the button
located next to the exterior lamps control on the left side
of the instrument panel to open the trunk. The shift lever
must be in P (Park).
The trunk can also be opened by lowering the rear
seat and pulling the emergency trunk release handle
located inside the trunk. See Split Folding Rear Seat on
page 2‑10 and “Emergency Trunk Release Handle”
following.
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle located
on the latch inside the trunk . This handle will glow
following exposure to light. Pull the release handle to
open the trunk from the inside.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
WARNING:
{
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
WARNING:
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
The switches on the driver door armrest are used to
control each of the windows. Each passenger door has
its own window switch.
The power window switches work while the ignition
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or while Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3‑21
.
To lower the window, press and hold the front of the
switch to the first position until the window is at the
desired level. To raise the window, pull up and hold the
front of the switch.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Sun Visors
The driver window switch has an express-down
feature labeled AUTO. This lets you lower the window
completely without holding the switch. Press the front
of the switch to the second position and release.
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors. They can
be detached from the center retainer and slid along the
rod to cover different areas of the front window and
turned to cover the side windows.
To stop the window while it is lowering, briefly pull up on
the switch.
Visor Vanity Mirror
On vehicles with this feature, swing down the sun
visors and lift the cover to expose the vanity mirror.
Do not drive with the cover lifted due to possible glare
impeding other drivers behind or to the side of the
vehicle.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The driver window switches
also include a lockout switch. Press the right side of the
switch to prevent the rear passengers from using their
window switches. The driver can still control all the
windows and the front passenger can control their own
window with the lockout on. Press the left side of the
switch to return to normal window operation. A red bar
on the right side of the switch indicates that the lockout
is off.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they
do not make it impossible to steal.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
Content Theft-Deterrent
The alarm system will arm when you use either power
lock switch to lock the doors while any door is open and
the key is removed from the ignition. The alarm system
will not arm if the truck is open when you use either
power lock switch to lock the doors.
Your vehicle may have the optional content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
To activate the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. If you
are using the RKE transmitter, the door does not
need to be open.
Arming with the RKE Transmitter
The alarm system will arm when you use your RKE
transmitter to lock the doors, if the key is not in the
ignition.
3. Close all doors.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to
enter the vehicle without using the RKE transmitter
or a key or turns the ignition on with an incorrect key.
The horn will sound and the turn signal lamps will flash
for about 30 seconds.
Disarming with the RKE Transmitter
The alarm system will disarm when you use your RKE
transmitter to unlock the doors.
The first time a remote unlock command is received,
three flashes will be seen and three horn chirps heard
to indicate an alarm condition has occurred since last
arming.
When the alarm is armed, the trunk may be opened with
the RKE transmitter. The power door lock switches are
disabled and the doors remain locked. You must use
your RKE transmitter or your key to unlock the doors
when the system is armed.
Disarming with Your Key
The alarm system will disarm when you use your key to
unlock the doors or insert your key in the ignition and
turn it from the LOCK/OFF position.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
If the engine does not start and the security light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try
again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 6‑94. If the engine still does
not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service.
If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty.
See your dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+
to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact
Roadside Assistance.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer or
a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have
keys made and programmed to the system.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START from
the LOCK/OFF position.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new additional key:
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
.
Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
the new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in.
See Towing a Trailer on page 5‑27 for the
trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle
and more information.
Following break‐in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from left to
right while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn't work, then the vehicle needs service.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the position in which
you can operate the radio and windshield wipers while
the engine is off. To use ACC/ACCESSORY, turn the
key clockwise.
C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
and the brake pedal must be applied.
D (START): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer.
A warning chime will sound and the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display DRIVER'S DOOR AJAR
when the driver door is opened, the ignition is in
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF and the key is
in the ignition. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑44 for more information.
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission. This is the only position in which
the ignition key can be inserted or removed.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Procedure
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will slow down as
the engine warms. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm
up and lubricate all moving parts.
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine turned off:
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows
The radio will work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF the radio will continue to
work 10 minutes or until the driver's door is opened.
The power windows will continue to work for up to
10 minutes or until any door is opened.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and
the key is held in START, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor
damage. To prevent gear damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the
ignition switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF position.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position.
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5‐10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key
in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, repeat
these steps. This clears the extra gasoline from the
engine. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm‐up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is attached to the underside of the
diagonal brace, which is located above the engine
air cleaner/filter assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you do not,
the engine might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
The automatic transmission has a shift lever on the
steering column or on the console between the seats.
WARNING:
{
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts, and prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer in the area
where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice
on this.
There is a display, located on the instrument panel
cluster that will indicate the gear the vehicle is in.
Maximum engine speed is limited on automatic
transmission vehicles while in P (Park) or N (Neutral) to
protect driveline components from improper operation.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
Then press the shift lever button and move the shift
lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park on
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when the engine is started because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
page 3‑28
.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 5‑18
.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
page 5‑27
.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply the brakes first, then press the shift lever button
before you can shift from P (Park) while the ignition
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all
the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application.
WARNING:
{
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads,
when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between
gears and when going down a steep hill.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes.
You can use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help control
vehicle speed as you go down steep mountain roads.
You would also want to use the brakes off and on.
D (Drive) : This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
.
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Notice: Driving in 2 (Second) for more than 25 miles
(40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h) may
damage the transmission. Also, shifting into
2 (Second) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h)
can cause damage. Drive in 3 (Third) or D (Drive)
instead of 2 (Second).
.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to the next gear
and the vehicle will have more power.
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes.
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the shift lever is in 1 (First) while the vehicle is
moving forward, the transmission will not shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”
under Loss of Control on page 5‑11.
Notice: Driving the vehicle if you notice that it is
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you increase
speed may damage the transmission. Have the
vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in
2 (Second) when you are driving less than 35 mph
(55 km/h) and D (Drive) for higher speeds until then.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive)
without using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third)
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before driving.
Parking Brake
If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑27.
Shifting Into Park
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
The parking brake is located to the left of the brake
pedal, near the driver door.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,
then push down the parking brake pedal.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down and push the parking brake pedal. When you lift
your foot off the parking brake pedal, the pedal will
follow it to the released position.
page 5‑27
.
A warning chime will sound and a brake warning light
located on the instrument panel cluster will come on,
if the parking brake is set, the ignition is on and the
vehicle speed is greater than 8 km/h (5 mph).
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
Steering Column Shift Lever
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand,
the vehicle is in P (Park).
If the vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use this
procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
3. With your foot still holding the brake pedal down,
set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 3‑26 for more information.
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand,
the vehicle is in P (Park).
Console Shift Lever
If the vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever, use
this procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. See Parking
Brake on page 3‑26 for more information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. While keeping the brake pedal applied, set the
parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑26
for more information.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Console Shift
Torque Lock
If the console shift lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park):
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then
it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park).
To find out how, see “Shifting Into Park” in this section.
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN position. See Ignition
Positions on page 3‑20 for more information.
3. Let up on the shift lever and make sure the shift
lever is pushed all the way into P (Park).
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
4. Press the shift lever button
5. Then, move the shift into the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer or a professional towing service.
Shifting Out of Park
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Column Shift
The vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:
If the column shift lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park):
.
Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.
is in P (Park)
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN position.
See Ignition Positions on page 3‑20 for more
information.
.
Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the regular
brake pedal is applied.
3. Shift out of the P (Park) position to the N (Neutral)
position.
The shift lock is always functional except in the case of
a an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery.
4. Move the vehicle to a safe location.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 6‑39.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer or a professional towing service.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
.
The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
.
There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
Engine Exhaust
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
WARNING:
.
{
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
.
The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
(Continued)
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle
when the engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, always
set the parking brake and move the shift lever
to P (Park).
WARNING:
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen
or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed
area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑29.
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 3‑26.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 5‑27.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Mirrors
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
Manual Rearview Mirror
mirror with the OnStar® System.
Press the button located below the mirror, on the far
left, for up to three seconds to turn the dimming feature
off and on.
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror
to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Pull the
lever, located at the bottom of the mirror for nighttime
use. Return the lever to its original position for the day
position.
There are two map lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the button next to each lamp to turn it on
and off.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom of
the mirror. See your dealer for more information about
OnStar® and how to subscribe to it. See the OnStar®
owner's guide for more information about the service
OnStar® provides.
If the vehicle has map lamps, press the buttons located
at the bottom of the mirror to turn them on or off.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information about OnStar® and how to
subscribe to it. See the OnStar® owner's guide for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
WARNING:
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door
armrest.
{
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat.
1. Press the left or right side of the selector switch
located beneath the control pad, to select the
driver or passenger mirror.
2. Press one of the four buttons located on the
control pad to move the mirror to the desired
direction.
Outside Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
outside rearview mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger”
under Climate Control System on page 4‑16 for more
information.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Universal Home Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This
includes any garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to
assist you in programming the transmitter.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. Only the original remote control
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming.
The programmed buttons should be erased when
the vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home
Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or gate
that is being programmed.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go
to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit and may be a colored button.
Press this button. After pressing this button,
complete the following steps in less than
30 seconds.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be
used to control the garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may need
to be held for up to 20 seconds.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
www.learcar2u.com.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as
an additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-5, choosing
a different function button in Step 3 than what was used
for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the
motor head and hand held transmitter are different,
or if the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program the Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when
the original hand held transmitter is not available.
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of
the garage door opener motor. If there are a row
of dip switches similar to the graphic above, the
garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you
do not see a row of dip switches, return to the
previous section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
Your hand held transmitter can have between eight
to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
.
When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
.
When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
.
If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 will
now become the button strokes to be entered
into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4.
Be sure to enter the switch settings written
down in Step 2, in order from left to right, into
the Universal Home Remote, when completing
Step 4.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should be
similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
.
A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
.
A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
.
A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. This button may need
to be held for up to 55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for the
garage door opener.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle's
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for
each switch setting as follows:
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half
of a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
.
If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
.
.
If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
Cupholders
Cupholders may be built into the front center console,
front portion of the front center seat, and rear armrest of
the vehicle.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
A storage compartment for sunglasses may be located
above the rearview mirror. Push on cover to open the
compartment.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release
both buttons. The codes from all buttons will be
erased.
Center Console Storage
For vehicles with a front center console storage area,
open it by pulling up on the latch located in the front of
the console cover.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6.
Rear Storage Area
For vehicles with a split folding rear seat, there are two
storage areas underneath. Pull the tab(s) located by the
passenger side safety belt buckle and the driver side
rear seat to access the storage areas. See Split Folding
Rear Seat on page 2‑10 for more information.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (Vent/Express-Open): Press this switch once to vent
the sunroof when it is closed. When using the vent, the
sunshade should be fully opened. The sunshade can
be opened or closed manually by sliding it rearward or
forward.
Rear Seat Armrest
For vehicles with a rear seat armrest, pull the tab on the
armrest forward to access it.
Convenience Net
From the vent position, press this switch again to
activate the express-open feature. Press the close
switch to stop movement of the sunroof. The sunshade
will automatically open when using express‐open.
For vehicles with a convenience net, it is located in
the rear. Use it to store small loads as far forward as
possible. The net should not be used to store heavy
loads.
A deflector will automatically pop up when the sunroof
is opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof is
closed.
Sunroof
R (Close): Press and hold this switch until the sunroof
motor stops to close the sunroof, or release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
On vehicles with a
sunroof, the sunroof
switches are located on
the overhead console.
Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the
tracks that could cause an issue with sunroof operation,
noise or plug the water drainage system. Periodically
open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from sunroof.
The sunroof can only be operated when the ignition
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3‑21.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Battery Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Accessory Power Outlet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Map Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . 4-21
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light . . . 4-28
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light . . . . . . 4-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . . 4-30
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 Instrument Panel
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Using an MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
DIC Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
DIC Vehicle Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Overview
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers let you warn others that
you have a problem.
The hazard warning flasher button is located on top of
the steering column.
| : Press to make the front and rear turn signal lamps
flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the
flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals will not work.
Horn
To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever.
Then move the wheel to a comfortable position and
release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows the steering wheel to be adjusted
before driving. The steering wheel can be raised to the
highest level for more room when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
The tilt wheel lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
will flash in the direction
of the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is completed. If the lever is briefly pressed
and released, the turn signal flashes three times.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane Change Signals
2 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
N : Windshield Wipers
The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes
rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb might be
burned out.
LQ : Windshield Washer
Flash-to-Pass.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lamps
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
on page 4‑9
.
page 6‑94.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Windshield Wipers
If either one of the turn signals are left on and the
vehicle has been driven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km),
a chime will sound.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn to 8, then release.
Several wipes, hold the band on 8 longer.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
9 (Off): Turns the windshield wipers off.
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Turn the band up for
more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes.
This instrument panel cluster light 3 comes on if the
high beam lamps are turned on while the ignition is in
ON/RUN.
6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
? (High Speed): Fast wipes.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced.
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
Flash-to-Pass
This feature is used to signal to the vehicle ahead that
you want to pass.
page 6‑50
.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
If the headlamps are off or in the low‐beam position, pull
the turn signal lever toward you to momentarily switch
to high‐beams.
Release the lever to turn the high-beam headlamps off.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
At the top of the multifunction lever, there is a paddle
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
40 km/h (25 mph) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
with L on it. Push the paddle to spray washer fluid
on the windshield. The wipers run for several sweeps
and then either stop or return to the preset speed.
The ignition key must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN for this to work. See Windshield Washer Fluid
WARNING:
{
on page 6‑33
.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
WARNING:
{
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
When the vehicle is low on washer fluid, the WASHER
FLUID LOW ADD FLUID displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) for 60 seconds. When the
ignition is turned off, this message displays again for
three seconds to remind you that the fluid level is low.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS)
and the cruise control is on, TCS will begin to limit
wheel spin and the cruise control automatically turns off.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑7
When road conditions allow you to safely use it again,
the cruise control can be turned back on.
.
Until the fluid reservoir is refilled, every time the vehicle
is started, the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
message displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
for 60 seconds. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑44
.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
Setting Cruise Control
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to the
desired speed. See Instrument Panel Cluster on
page 4‑22
.
WARNING:
{
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise control on and off.
The indicator is lit when cruise control is on.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press briefly to make the
vehicle resume to a previously set speed, or press and
hold to accelerate.
1. Press the T button to turn the cruise system on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
SET– : Press to set the speed and activate cruise
control or make the vehicle decelerate.
3. Press and release the SET– button located on the
steering wheel.
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage cancel cruise control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the
brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged
without erasing the set speed from memory.
If the cruise control system is already activated,
.
Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h (25 mph) or
greater, press the +RES button on the steering wheel.
The vehicle returns to the previously selected speed
and stays there.
wheel until the lower speed desired is reached,
then release it.
.
To slow down in small amounts, press the SET–
button briefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is already activated,
.
Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will
slow down to the cruise speed you set earlier.
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
.
To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Exterior Lamps
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a
lower gear to keep your speed down. If the brakes are
applied the cruise control will turn off.
The exterior lamps
control is located on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
It controls the following systems:
.
.
To disengage cruise control, step lightly on the
Headlamps
brake pedal, or
.
Taillamps
.
Press the [ button on the steering wheel.
.
Parking Lamps
.
.
To turn off the cruise control, press the T button
on the steering wheel.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased from
memory by pressing T or if the ignition is turned off.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together with
the following lamps listed below. When the headlamps
are turned on while the vehicle is on, the headlamps will
turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is
turned off. When the headlamps are turned on while the
vehicle is off, the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes
before automatically turning off to prevent the battery
from being drained. Turn the headlamp control to off
and then back to the headlamp on position to make
the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes.
O (Off): Turns off the automatic headlamps and
daytime running lamps (DRL). Turning the headlamp
control to the off position again will turn the automatic
headlamps or DRL back on. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, the off position only works when the vehicle is
shifted into the P (Park) position.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the
following:
.
Parking Lamps
.
Parking Lamps
.
Taillamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Taillamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
License Plate Lamps
# (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped): Turns on the fog lamps.
See Fog Lamps on page 4‑11.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada.
Fog Lamps
# (Fog Lamps): For vehicles with fog lamps,
the button is located on the exterior lamps control.
The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the fog
lamps to come on.
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:
Press # to turn the fog lamps on or off. A light will
come on in the instrument panel cluster.
.
The ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the
fog lamps also go off.
.
The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
.
The engine is running.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
When the DRL are on, the regular headlamps,
taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps are not on.
The instrument panel and cluster are also not on.
Instrument Panel Brightness
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): The knob with this
symbol on it is located next to the exterior lamps control
to the left of the steering wheel. Push the knob in all
the way until it extends out and then turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the
lights. Push the knob back in when finished.
The headlamps automatically change from DRL to the
regular headlamps depending on the darkness of the
surroundings. The other lamps that come on with the
headlamps will also come on.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps go off
and the DRL come on.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
Do not cover the light sensor on top of the instrument
panel because it works with the DRL.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entry lighting includes a feature called theater dimming.
With theater dimming, the lamps do not turn off at the
end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly dim and then
go out. The delay time is canceled if the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN or the power door lock switch is
pressed. The lamps will dim right away.
Courtesy Lamps
When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps
automatically come on. They make it easy for
you to enter and leave your vehicle. You can also
manually turn these lamps on by fully turning the
instrument panel brightness control clockwise.
When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is inactive,
which means the courtesy lamps will not come on
unless a door is opened.
The reading lamps, located on the rearview mirror,
can be turned on or off independent of the automatic
courtesy lamps, when the doors are closed.
Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.
Dome Lamp
The center mounted dome lamp overhead comes on
when a door is opened. This lamp can also be turned
on by turning the instrument panel brightness control
clockwise.
The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting to
work. Immediately after all the doors have been closed,
the delayed entry lighting feature continues to work until
one of the following occurs:
Entry Lighting
.
The ignition is in ON/RUN.
For vehicles with courtesy lamps, they come on and
stay on for a set time whenever the unlock symbol
is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, if the vehicle has one.
.
The doors are locked.
.
An illumination period of about 25 seconds has
elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period is canceled and the interior
lamps remain on.
If a door is opened, the lamps stay on while it is open
and then turn off automatically about 20 seconds after
the door is closed. If the unlock symbol is pressed and
no door is opened, the lamps turn off after about
20 seconds.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Exit Lighting
Map Lamps
This feature illuminates the interior for a period of time
after the key is removed from the ignition.
The vehicle has map lamps on the rearview mirror.
Press the button near each lamp on the mirror to turn
the map lamps on and off.
The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting to work.
When the key is removed, interior illumination activates
and remains on until one of the following occurs:
Electric Power Management
.
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
The ignition is in ON/RUN.
.
The power door locks are activated.
.
An illumination period of 20 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on because a door is open.
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
Parade Dimming
Parade mode automatically prohibits the dimming of the
instrument panel displays during the daylight while the
headlamps are on so that the displays are still able to
be seen.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
Reading Lamps
The vehicle has reading lamps that also act as the
dome lamp. Press the button near each lamp to turn
them on and off.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature helps prevent the battery from being
drained, if the interior courtesy lamps, reading/map
lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk lamp are accidentally
left on. If any of these lamps are left on, they
automatically turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is
off. The lamps will not come back on again until one of
the following occurs:
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
.
The ignition is turned on.
.
The exterior lamps control is turned off, then on
again.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest
levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable
to the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or
LOW BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce the electrical
loads as much as possible. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑44.
The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if they are
manually turned on with the ignition on or off.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible to
the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle and adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer for additional information on the power
accessory plugs.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The vehicle has three 12‐volt outlets which can be
used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
On vehicles with a center console, one outlet is located
inside the center floor console and two outlets are
located at the front of the console bin under the
instrument panel. Lift the cover to access the outlet.
Close the cover when not using the outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment.
On vehicles without a center console, two are located
under the climate controls and another outlet for the
rear seat passengers is at the rear of the center front
seat. Remove the cover to access the outlets. When
not using the outlet, make sure the cover is closed.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with the
equipment. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use anything that
exceeds the maximum amperage rating of 20 amps.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied to
the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
The vehicle may have an ashtray and a cigarette lighter.
The ashtray and cigarette lighter may be located in the
console, if the vehicle has one, otherwise, they may be
located in the center armrest of the front seat.
Climate Control System
This vehicle may have a dual or single climate
control system. The heating, cooling, defrost, defog
and ventilation can be controlled with this system.
For vehicles with heated seats, see Heated Seats on
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are
put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
page 2‑6
.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
To use the lighter, just push it in all the way and let go.
When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls
A. Fan Control
B. Outside Air
C. Recirculation
E. Air Conditioning
F. Driver and Passenger
Heated Seats
G. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
D. Air Delivery Mode
Control
H. Rear Window Defogger
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. Positioning the
knob between two modes, can select a combination of
those modes.
If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest
setting, the passenger compartment air filter may need
to be replaced. There will be some airflow noticeable
from the various outlets when driving, even with the fan
in the off position. For more information, see Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 4‑20 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3.
Single Zone
E. Air Delivery Mode
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
inside the vehicle.
A. Fan Control
Control
B. Outside Air
F. Air Conditioning
G. Rear Window Defogger
C. Temperature Control
D. Recirculation
Temperature Control: For dual zone, turn the
thumbwheels up or down to increase or decrease
the temperature on the driver or the passenger side
of the vehicle. For single zone, turn the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air
conditioning system on or off. An indicator light
comes on to show that it is on. The air conditioning
can be selected in any mode as long as the fan is
on and the outside temperature is above freezing.
A flashing indicator light indicates that the air
conditioning compressor is currently not available.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some
of the air directed to the windshield and side window
outlets. In this mode, the system automatically selects
outside air.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windshield of fog or
moisture. Air is directed equally to the windshield and
the floor outlets. When defog is selected, the system
turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is below
40°F (4°C).
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the H mode.
2. Press the # button.
3. Select the coolest temperature for both zones.
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog or
frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield with
some air to the side window vents and the floor vents.
When defrost is selected, the system automatically
forces outside air into the vehicle. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this setting, unless
the outside temperature is below 40°F (4°C).
4. Select the highest 9 speed.
5. When the coolest temperature is selected in the
A/C mode, the system automatically goes into the
recirculation mode to improve cooling.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after the air inside the
vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger): The rear window
defogger turns off automatically after it has been
activated for 10 minutes. It can be turned off manually,
by pressing the button again or by turning the ignition
to the LOCK/OFF position. The rear window defogger
can be turned on again for additional window clearing.
The length of defogger operation will increase if the
vehicle is being driven.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water may drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
: (Outside Air): Press to turn on outside air.
An indicator light comes on to show that it is on.
Outside air will circulate throughout the vehicle.
? (Recirculation): Press to turn on the recirculation
mode. An indicator light comes on to show that it is on.
For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface
of the mirror when the rear window defog button is
pressed. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 3‑32.
This mode helps to quickly heat or cool the air inside
the vehicle once the temperature inside the vehicle is
equal to or better than the outside temperature. It can
be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering
the vehicle. The recirculation mode is not available in
outside air, floor, defog or defrost modes. If the button
is selected while in these modes, the indicator flashes
three times.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Use the thumbwheel located below or to the side of the
outlet, to change the direction of the air flow.
The vehicle has a passenger compartment particulate
air filter. It is located in the engine compartment, below
the air inlet grille on the passenger side.
Operation Tips
The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering
the climate control system. It needs to be changed
periodically to ensure system performance.
.
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may block
the flow of air into the vehicle.
For information on how often to change the passenger
.
compartment air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance on
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
page 7‑3
.
.
To change the passenger compartment air filter:
Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside the vehicle
more effectively.
1. Turn off the ignition when the windshield wipers
are in the up position.
.
If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
2. Raise the vehicle hood.
highest setting, the passenger compartment air
filter, if equipped, may need to replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter
on page 4‑20 and Scheduled Maintenance on
3. Pull back the hood weatherstrip from the
passengers side of the vehicle halfway to center.
page 7‑3
.
.
If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi-level modes
with mild temperature throughout the vehicle, turn
on the air conditioner to reduce windshield fogging.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there
is a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
Gauges can indicate when there might be or there is
a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Often
gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
4. Remove the air inlet grille retainers.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
5. Lift the air inlet grille and disconnect the washer
hose at the quick-connect.
6. Remove the air inlet grille.
7. Remove the water deflector plate.
8. Remove the old passenger compartment air filter.
9. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.
For best climate control system performance, reinstall
the air filter.
For the type of filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 7‑12.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
about how much fuel has been used and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States Uplevel shown, Base and Canada similar
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the vehicle's speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (used in the United States) or
in kilometers (used in Canada).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If the
odometer displays ERROR, it probably has been
tampered with and the numbers might not be accurate.
The safety belt light
comes on and stays on
for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it must
be set to the mileage total of the old odometer. If that is
not possible, then it will be set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver's door to show the old mileage
reading of the vehicle when the new odometer was
installed.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, the
vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
in the shaded warning area.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and
chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Several seconds after the engine is started,
a chime sounds for several seconds to remind
the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This only occurs if the passenger airbag is enabled.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑68 for
more information. The passenger safety belt light,
located on the instrument panel, comes on and stays
on for several seconds and then flashes for
several more.
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag's electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on the
airbag system, see Airbag System on page 2‑58.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have
it fixed immediately.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
WARNING:
{
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑68 for
important safety information. The instrument panel
has a passenger airbag status indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑44 for more information.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds as a system check.
If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from
a distance, if equipped, you may not see the system
check. Then, after several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or
off symbol to let you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but the
engine is not running, as
a check to show it is
working.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for
more information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light
on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
WARNING:
{
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑24
for more information, including important safety
information.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light
stays on if the parking brake does not fully release.
If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released,
it means the vehicle has a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle's hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still
work and stop the vehicle. For good braking both parts
need to be working well.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push, or the
pedal can go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑24.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
WARNING:
{
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when the engine is
started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
The Antilock Brake
System (ABS) light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
For vehicles with a
Traction Control System
(TCS) and StabiliTrak®
warning light, this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the
vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑27.
When the system is active, the light flashes while the
system is limiting wheel spin or assisting with controlling
the vehicle.
If it stays on or comes on while driving a SERVICE
TRACTION CONTROL message appears in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). This indicates that there could
be a problem with the traction control system and the
vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on
and the SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message
appears on the DIC, the system does not limit
wheel spin.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for all
brake related DIC messages.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the traction control system is manually turned off, this
light comes on and the TRACTION CONTROL OFF
message appears on the DIC.
If the light stays on, or comes on while driving a
SERVICE STABILITRAK message appears in the
DIC. This indicates that there may be a problem with
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system and the
vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on
and the SERVICE STABILITRAK message appears on
the DIC, the ESC system does not assist in controlling
the vehicle.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑7 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for more
information.
Electronic Stability Control Indicator
Light
When the system is active, the light flashes while the
system is assisting in controlling the vehicle.
This light comes on
briefly while the engine
is started. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer. If the
system is working
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑5
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for
more information.
normally the indicator
light will then go off.
This light can come on after the vehicle is first driven
and the STABILITRAK NOT READY message appears
in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑5 for more
information.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
This light comes on briefly
while starting the vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light
goes off.
United States
Canada
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gauge pointer moves toward the “H”
overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑29
.
(United States) or torward the shaded thermostat
(Canada), it means that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been operating under
normal driving conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
The vehicle's engine could be damaged, and it
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never
drive with the engine coolant temperature warning
light on.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on
when the engine has overheated.
See Engine Overheating on page 6‑29 for more
information.
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑29 for
more information.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started. It provides
information about tire
pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring
System.
This indicates that there may be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for
about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑62 for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑37 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59
for more information.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it is working. If it
does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
See Accessories and Modifications on page 6‑3.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling
after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 6‑10. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full
tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6‑6.
If none of the above have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. The dealer has the
proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
.
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or might begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on with the engine running,
or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
WARNING:
{
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if the battery has
recently been replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take several days of
routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack
of OBD II system readiness, your dealer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other
system problem.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle's
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3‑17
.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 4‑6 for more information.
Highbeam On Light
Fog Lamp Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps
are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4‑5
for more information.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 4‑11 for more information.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
Fuel Gauge
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with the fuel gauge:
.
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gauge reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the fuel tank's
capacity to fill the tank.
.
The gauge moves a little when while turning a
corner or speeding up.
United States
Canada
.
The gauge does not go back to empty when the
ignition is turned off.
When the ignition is on, the fuel gauge indicates about
how much fuel is left in the fuel tank.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, to the right of the instrument panel cluster.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
below the speedometer in the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel, to
the right of the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Buttons
The buttons are the trip/
fuel, vehicle information,
customization, and set/
reset buttons. The button
functions are detailed in
the following pages.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was last
displayed before the engine was turned off.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected. The bottom line of the DIC shows the shift
lever position indicator. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 3‑23 for more information.
If your vehicle has these features, the DIC also
displays the compass direction and the outside air
temperature when viewing the trip and fuel information.
The compass direction appears on the top right corner
of the DIC display. The outside air temperature
automatically appears in the bottom right corner of the
DIC display. If there is a problem with the system that
controls the temperature display, the numbers will be
replaced with dashes. If this occurs, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, average economy,
instantaneous economy, Active Fuel Management™
indicator on vehicles with this feature, and average
speed.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4‑51 for more
information.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip A and Trip B
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings, compass zone
and compass calibration on vehicles with this feature,
and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming.
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIPA or TRIP B
displays. This display shows the current distance
traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the
last reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers
can be used at the same time.
U (Customization): Press this button to customize
the feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4‑51 for more information.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
pressing the set/reset button while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on
the DIC.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold
the set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven
5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles
(8.4 km), etc.
Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after
the vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,
the display will show the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) that were driven during the last ignition
cycle.
Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY
displays. This display shows the approximate average
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). This number is calculated based on the
number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time
this menu item was reset. To reset this display to zero,
press and hold the set/reset button.
Fuel Range
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle
can be driven without refueling.
Instantaneous Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until INST ECONOMY
displays. This display shows the current fuel economy
at a particular moment and will change frequently as
driving conditions change. This display shows the
instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg)
or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average
economy, this screen cannot be reset.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may change
even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank.
This is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
Average Speed
Press the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE SPEED
displays. This display shows the average speed of the
vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
(km/h). This average is calculated based on the various
vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this
value. To reset the value, press and hold the set/reset
button. The display will return to zero.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message displays. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for more
information.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful
not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other
than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be
reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the
engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life System on
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an
estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If you see
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means
99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life
system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions.
page 6‑18
.
Units
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44
.
You should change the oil as soon as possible.
See Engine Oil on page 6‑15. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3 for more information.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure
Relearn Remote Key
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park).
This display allows you to match the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. This procedure
will erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore,
they must be relearned as additional transmitters.
System (TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be
viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in
either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Press the vehicle information button until the DIC
displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC
displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
1. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
add air to a specific tire will appear in the display.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for more
information.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer for service.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Change Compass Zone
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
Your vehicle may have this feature. To change the
compass zone through the DIC, see DIC Compass on
page 4‑42
.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Calibrate Compass
Blank Display
Your vehicle may have this feature. The compass can
be manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass
through the DIC, see DIC Compass on page 4‑42.
This display shows no information.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Compass
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
Your dealer will set the correct zone for your location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state
or province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth's
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the
compass is not set to the zone where you live, the
compass may give false readings. The compass must
be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is
traveling.
2. Find the vehicle's current location and variance
zone number on the map.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
displays.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,
or other industrial structures, if possible.
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in which
the vehicle is located. See “Compass Variance
(Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during the
calibration procedure.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for
example, N for North, or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount,
a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad holder,
or any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move
the magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate
the compass.
2. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASS displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE
for a few seconds when the calibration is complete.
The DIC display will then return to PRESS V TO
CALIBRATE COMPASS.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
DIC Warnings and Messages
This message displays when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
At the point that the features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save
the charge in the battery.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another. Some messages may not require immediate
action, but you can press the set/reset button to
acknowledge that you received the message and
clear it from the DIC display. Pressing any of the DIC
buttons also acknowledges and clears any messages.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be cleared.
You should take any messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
messages will only make the messages disappear,
not correct the problem. The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed and some information
about them.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the
battery to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when service is required for the
vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine Oil on page 6‑15
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more
information.
Acknowledging the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING.
That must be done at the OIL LIFE screen under the
vehicle information menu. See “Oil Life” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑37 and Engine Oil
Life System on page 6‑18.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned off. See Exterior Lamps on page 4‑9 for
more information.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned on. See Exterior Lamps on page 4‑9 for
more information.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑29
for more information.
ENGINE HOT A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays along with a continuous chime
when the engine has overheated. Stop and turn the
engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage.
See Engine Overheating on page 6‑29.
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the A/C operation automatically resumes. You can
continue to drive your vehicle. If this message continues
to appear, have the system repaired by your dealer
as soon as possible to avoid compressor damage.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the vehicle's engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to
your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be
driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to
your dealer for service as soon as possible.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on
page 6‑29 for more information.
ERROR
This message displays while viewing the odometer or
trip odometers if there is a problem with the instrument
panel cluster. See your dealer for service.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gauge on page 4‑36 and Filling the Tank on
page 6‑10 for more information.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil
pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur.
If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause
of the low oil pressure is corrected. See Engine Oil
on page 6‑15 for more information.
HOOD OPEN
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays when the hood is not closed
properly. Make sure that the hood is closed completely.
See Hood Release on page 6‑13.
This message displays when the vehicle's engine oil
pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure Light on
page 4‑34
.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer as soon as possible
when this message is displayed.
This message displays when the outside air
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the driver side rear door is
not closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
This message displays when the front passenger door
is not closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your
vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 3‑4 and DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4‑37 for more information.
This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 4‑24 for more information.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with
the generator and battery charging systems. Driving
with this problem could drain the battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the electrical
system checked by your dealer immediately.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays when the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4
.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed properly. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
This message displays when service is required on the
brake system. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer as soon as possible. The brake system warning
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster when
this message appears on the DIC. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑27.
SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer if you notice a drop in heating
and air conditioning efficiency.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
This message displays when a problem is detected
with the power steering system. When this message
is displayed, you may notice that the effort required to
steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier, but you will
still be able to steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer immediately.
This message displays when there is a problem with the
theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A fault
has been detected in the system which means that the
system is disabled and it is not protecting the vehicle.
The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may want to
take the vehicle to your dealer before turning off the
engine. See PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation on page 3‑18 for more information.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays if there has been a problem
detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster. See Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) on page 5‑5 for more information.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS
is not working properly. The tire pressure light also
flashes and then remains on during the same ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 4‑31. Several
conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑62 for more
information. If the warning comes on and stays on,
there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns
back on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the system inspected by your dealer as
soon as possible.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled due to the electronic throttle control system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays when the system is not
functioning properly. A warning light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster. See Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning Light on page 4‑28. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑7 for more
information. Have the TCS serviced by your dealer as
soon as possible.
This message only appears while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem with the
transmission. See your dealer for service.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you were
away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 3‑17 for more information.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer as soon as possible.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message may be displayed if the gas cap is not
on, or is not fully tightened. Check the gas cap to
ensure that it is on properly. See Filling the Tank on
page 6‑10 for more information.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message may display and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving
the vehicle and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for
30 seconds. The ESC system is not functional until the
light has turned off. See Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 5‑5 for more information.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 4‑37. The DIC also
shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation and
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), this message displays when
the TPMS is re-learning the tire positions on your
vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
Displays on page 4‑37
.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays when the TCS turns off.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑7
for more information.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑65
,
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑60, and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59 for more
information.
This message may display when the ignition is in
ON/RUN and disappears after 10 seconds, unless
it is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears.
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
one or more of the vehicle's tires is low. This message
also displays LEFT FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (right
front), LEFT RR (left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear)
to indicate the location of the low tire. The low tire
pressure warning light will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 4‑31. You can receive more
than one tire pressure message at a time. To read the
other messages that may have been sent at the same
time, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure
message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
Have the tire pressures checked and set to those
shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See Tires
on page 6‑52, Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19, and
Any of the following conditions may cause the TCS to
turn off:
.
The TCS is turned off by pressing the traction
control button. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 5‑7 for more information.
.
The battery is low.
.
There is a TCS failure. See your dealer for service.
TRACTION CONTROL ON
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays when the TCS is turned on.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑7 for
more information.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message displays when the transmission fluid
in your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow
it to idle until it cools down. If the warning message
continues to display, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer as soon as possible.
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer reservoir as soon
as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 6‑14 for the location of the windshield washer
reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑33 for more information.
TRUNK OPEN
DIC Vehicle Customization
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
Your vehicle has customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.
Customization features can only be programmed to one
setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a
preferred setting for two different drivers.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the turn
signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4‑4.
All of the customization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
when the ignition is in ON/RUN. The message will not
disappear until the turn signal is manually turned off,
or a turn is completed.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature
settings menu.
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering
the menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows
you to select which doors and when the doors will
automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Door Unlock on page 3‑11 for more information.
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if any of the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4
for more information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver's door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
HORN & LIGHTS OFF: There will be no feedback
when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver's door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park) .
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when the
key is taken out of the ignition.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
HORN & LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock
button is pressed again within five seconds of the
previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4
for more information.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPROACH LIGHTING
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods
after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
This feature allows you to select the volume level of the
chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle
is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3‑4 for more information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE : No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE START
FACTORY SETTINGS
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn
the remote start off or on. The remote start feature
allows you to start the engine from outside of the
vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑7
for more information.
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to exit the FEATURE
SETTINGS menu.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until FEATURE
SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to exit
the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the FEATURE
SETTINGS menu.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
.
The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
.
Become familiar with the operation and controls of
.
The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
the audio system.
.
The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
.
Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
pressed.
radio stations.
.
The end of the feature settings menu is reached
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
and exited.
page 5‑2
.
.
A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
Notice: Contact your dealer before adding any
equipment.
selection made.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle's engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 3‑21 for more information.
WARNING:
{
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
Setting the Clock
24 hour, press the H button until 12H or 24H is
displayed. Once 12H or 24H is displayed, turn
Without Date Display
the f knob to the desired option to select the setting.
Press the H button again to apply the setting, or let the
screen time out.
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD Player
This radio has a H button for setting the time.
To set the time:
With Date Display
1. Press the H button until the hour begins flashing
Single CD (MP3) Player
on display. Press H a second time and the
minutes begin flashing on display.
This radio has a H button for setting the time.
To set the time and date:
2. To increase or decrease the time, do one of the
following while the hours or minutes are flashing:
1. Turn the radio on.
.
Turn the f knob.
2. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
.
Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.
.
Press \ FWD or s REV.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
tabs to be changed.
3. Press the H button again until the clock display
stops flashing to set the currently displayed time,
or wait five seconds until the flashing stops and the
current time displayed is automatically set.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To increase the time or date, do one of the
following:
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
.
Press the pushbutton below the selected tab.
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow tab. Once the time
12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month,
day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and
year) displays.
.
Turn the f knob clockwise.
.
Press ¨ SEEK.
.
Press \ FWD.
5. To decrease the time or date, do one of the
following:
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
.
Turn the f knob counter‐clockwise.
3. Press the H or MENU button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
.
Press © SEEK.
.
Press s REV.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press the H button while the radio is on. The date
with display times out after a few seconds and goes
back to the normal radio and time display.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio(s)
Radio with CD (MP3)
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
Radio with CD
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The Radio with
CD (MP3) has SCV. SCV automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and wind noise as the
vehicle increases or decreases speed while driving.
The volume level should sound about the same while
driving. To activate SCV:
Radio Data System (RDS)
The radio may have the Radio Data System (RDS)
feature. RDS is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies
upon receiving specific information from these stations
and only works when the information is available.
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the
station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a
radio station can broadcast incorrect information that
causes the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) tab on the radio display.
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
The radio goes to the previous volume setting when the
radio is turned on. The volume can still be adjusted by
using the volume knob.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations (Radio with CD)
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM on the
Radio with CD. The selection displays.
If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons. To program presets:
Press to switch between FM, AM, and XM™ on the
1. Turn the radio on.
Radio with CD (MP3).
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨ : Press to go to the previous or the next
station and stay there.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds.
When that pushbutton is pressed and released, the
station that was set, returns.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a few
seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
(Radio with CD (MP3))
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature.
See Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.
4 (Information) (Radio with CD (Base)): Press to
switch the display between the radio station frequency
and the time. While the ignition is off, press to display
the time.
4 (Information) (With XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press to display additional
text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM
station; or CD, MP3 or WMA song. If information is
available during XM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the
song title information displays on the top line of the
display and artist information displays on the bottom
line. When information is not available, No Info displays.
If the vehicle has XM and has a FAV button, a
maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six softkeys below the radio station
frequency tabs and by using the radio favorites page
button (FAV button).
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAV (Favorites): Press to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM stations. To store a
station as a favorite:
Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): The
radio may display some or all tones, such as BASS,
MID, and TREB. To adjust the tone settings, press
the f knob until the tone control tabs display. Press
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
the softkey under the desired tab, then turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can also be adjusted
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a
beep sounds. When that softkey is pressed and
released, the station that was set, returns.
by pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV
button until the desired levels are obtained. If a station's
frequency is weak, or has static, decrease the treble.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station you want
stored as a favorite.
The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position by pressing the softkey
under the BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB (treble) tab
for more than two seconds. The radio beeps once and
the level adjusts to the middle position.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone
and speaker controls to the middle position by pressing
2. Press the softkey below the FAV 1-6 tab.
the f knob for more than two seconds until the radio
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the softkey below the displayed page
numbers.
beeps once.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select preset equalization
settings.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing
the radio station frequency tabs and to begin the
process of programming favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
To return to the manual mode, press until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass and
depending on the radio, midrange, or treble by pressing
the f knob.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)
CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button
feature. To select and find a desired category:
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
or fade, press the ` if the radio has this symbol,
or the f knob until the speaker control tabs display.
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category tabs on the radio display. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the desired category
name displays.
Continue pressing the f knob to highlight the desired
tab, or press the softkey under the desired tab. Turn
the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
setting. The setting can also be adjusted by pressing
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV until the
desired levels are obtained.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade
to the middle position by pressing the softkey under the
BAL or FADE tab for more than two seconds. The radio
beeps once and the level adjusts to the middle position.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press the SEEK arrows
to go to the previous or to the next XM station
within the selected category.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all speaker
and tone controls to the middle position by pressing
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display favorites again.
the f knob for more than two seconds until the radio
beeps once.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer for service.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
Loc or Locked: If Loc or Locked displays, it means the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your dealer for service.
removed.
4. Press the softkey located under the Remove tab
until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
softkey under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the softkey under the Restore
All tab.
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 4‑74 later in this
section for further detail.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
© SEEK ¨ : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is
turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, while a CD is in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order.
To use random on the Radio with CD, press the RDM
button to play tracks from a CD in random order. The
random icon displays. Press again to turn off random
play. The random icon disappears from the display.
Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
To use random on the Radio with CD (MP3):
1. Press the CD/AUX button, insert a disc partway
into the slot of the CD player. A RDM tab displays.
2. To play the tracks in random order, press the
softkey under the RDM tab until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the softkey again to turn off
random play.
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
Care of CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and
the way the CD-R has been handled. Handle them
carefully. Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other
protective cases and away from direct sunlight and
dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the
disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play
properly or not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of
a CD while handling it; this could damage the surface.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge
of the hole and the outer edge.
To use repeat on the Radio with CD:
.
Press and release the RPT button to repeat the
current track. An arrow symbol displays. Press
again to turn off repeat play.
.
Press and hold the RPT button for a few seconds
to repeat the CD. An arrow symbol displays. Press
again to turn off repeat play. When repeat is off,
the symbol no longer displays.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD
is in the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, No Aux Input Device Found
may display.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of the CD Player
CD Messages
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
.
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD
optics with lubricants internal to the CD player
mechanism.
normal, the CD should play.
.
The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
.
There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer while reporting the problem.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio may have MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc
capability. For more information, see Using an MP3 on
page 4‑70 later in this section.
4-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
O (Power/Volume): Turn to increase or decrease
the volume of the portable player. Additional volume
adjustments might need to be made from the portable
device.
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output; do not plug the headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. However, an external audio device
such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
changer, or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected
to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for
audio listening.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing until it is stopped or turned off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
a portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, No Aux Input Device Found may display.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 5‑2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
While a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over the
vehicle speakers.
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder or
album should contain 18 songs or less.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio may have MP3 capability. With this feature,
the radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc. Song title, artist name, and album
can display when files are recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.
Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total number
of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.
.
.
Compressed Audio
Make sure playlists have a .m3u or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files.
By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio
and ignore the MP3 files. Pressing the CAT button
toggles between compressed and uncompressed audio
format.
Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a large
number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on
the display, potentially getting cut off.
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
.
Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc.
.
Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc
not to function in the player.
.
Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
.
The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
4-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and
No Folder
next folder buttons, the f knob, or the seek buttons.
An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded using
no file folders can also be played. If a CD contains
more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and
255 files, the player lets you access and navigate up to
the maximum, but all items over the maximum cannot
be accessed.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
searches playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD is treated as a folder. If the
root directory has compressed audio files, the directory
displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any root
directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Order of Play
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Empty Directory or Folder
.
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
.
Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
Playing an MP3
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the CD
currently playing.
© SEEK ¨ : Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the
next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed
multiple times, the player continues moving backward
or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey under the
Folder tab to go to the first track in the previous folder.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename is not displayed.
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey under the
Folder tab to go to the first track in the next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is heard
at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume
playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, you do not have playlist
editing capability using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed audio
song files.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing
the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
4-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a CD
in random, rather than sequential order. To use random:
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order on the CD and begins playing MP3
files by that artist. If you want to listen to MP3 files by
another artist, press the softkey below either arrow
button. The CD goes to the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button
until the desired artist displays.
1. To play MP3 files in random order from the CD
that is currently playing, press the softkey under
the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays.
Press the same softkey again to turn off
random play.
h (Music Navigator): If the radio has the MP3
feature, it has the music navigator feature to play MP3
files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order by artist or album.
Press the softkey below the music navigator tab.
The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and
album ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes
to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio might begin
playing while it is scanning the disc in the background.
When the scan is finished, the CD begins playing again.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the softkey below the Sort By tab. From
the sort screen, push one of the softkeys below the
album button. Press the softkey below the back tab to
return to the main music navigator screen. Now the
album name displays on the second line between the
arrows and songs from the current album begins to
play. Once all songs from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on
the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist
playing is shown on the second line of the display
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth : This channel is blocked or cannot
be received with your XM Subscription package.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
4-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to
interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers
and name tags.
Check Antenna: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver or antenna could
have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if
there is too much background noise.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
Bluetooth®
Audio System
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
(30 ft). Not all phones support all functions, and not all
phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information on compatible phones.
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle's front audio system
speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the
audio system volume knob, during a call, to change
the volume level. The adjusted volume level remains
in memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a
minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing Information:
Bluetooth Controls
.
Up to five cell phones can be paired to the
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑86 for more
information.
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system.
.
.
The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls, to
confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
.
.
Only one paired cell phone can be connected to
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made using OnStar®
Hands‐Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
4-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing a Phone
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
process.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN
number that was provided in Step 3.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>? Yes
or No” followed by a tone.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linking to a Different Phone
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with
“Store, number please” followed by a tone.
.
If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
.
.
If another phone is not found, the original
If the system recognizes the number it
phone remains connected.
responds with “OK, Storing” and repeats the
phone number.
Storing Name Tags
.
If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats
the number followed by “Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the
number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re‐entered.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
.
Store
.
Digit Store
.
Directory
4-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
.
.
If the name tag does not sound correct, say
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
“No” and repeat Step 5.
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
.
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
Using the Digit Store Command
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
.
If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
.
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
the name tag. The system responds with
“OK, deleting <name tag>, returning to the
main menu.”
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
.
If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”.
The system responds with “No. OK, let's try
again, please say the name tag.”
Deleting Name Tags
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
.
Delete
To use the delete all name tags command:
.
Delete all name tags
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
.
Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
.
Say “No” to cancel the function and return to
the main menu.
4-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Digit Dial Command
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
.
.
.
.
Dial
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with
“Digit dial using <phone name>, please say the
first digit to dial” followed by a tone.
Digit Dial
Call
Re‐dial
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>”. “Number please” followed by
a tone.
.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
number.
.
If the system recognizes the number, it
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
number.
will repeat them.
.
If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re‐entered.
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Call Command
Using the Re‐dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The system responds
with “Re‐dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
.
If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will ask
for the name tag to be re‐entered.
.
Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
.
Press c x to ignore a call.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
4-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Call Waiting
Ending a Call
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
Press c x to end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
.
Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
.
Press b g again to return to the original call.
To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
To Mute a call
.
original call with no action.
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
.
followed by a tone.
Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
Three‐Way Calling
Three‐Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
1. While on a call press b g. The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three‐way call”. The system responds with
“Three‐way call, please say dial or call”.
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in‐vehicle
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
the callers together.
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
Voice Pass-Thru
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes
after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.
.
The cell phone's normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone's
operating instructions.
ACC/ACCESSORY position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
4-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Number During a Call
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with
“Say a number to send tones” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
3. Say the number to send.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
.
If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
.
If the system is not sure it recognized the name
.
If the system is not sure it recognized the
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK, Sending <name
tag>” and the dial tones are sent and the call
continues.
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing the System
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Unless information is deleted out of the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending
on the vehicle's options.
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19 for FCC
information.
w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station stored
as a favorite, or the next track if a CD is playing.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
c x (Previous/End): Press to go to the previous
radio station stored as a favorite, the next track if a CD
is playing, to reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth® systems, press
and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact
with those systems. See the OnStar Owner's Guide and
Bluetooth® on page 4‑75 for more information.
4-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SRCE (Source): Press to choose between the radio
(AM, FM, XM), CD, and auxiliary input jack.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while in
AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨ to go to the next track or
chapter while sourced to the CD.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills
can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or
standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages,
or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a
period of time.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or
static, unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
Cellular Phone Usage
AM
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with
the vehicle's radio. This interference may occur
when making or receiving phone calls, charging
the phone's battery, or simply having the phone on.
This interference causes an increased level of static
while listening to the radio. If static is received while
listening to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and
turn it off.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna
connector needs to be properly attached to the post
on the glass.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window can damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do
not clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.
4-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Before Leaving on a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and the
Vehicle
WARNING:
{
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2‑13.
WARNING:
{
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
.
Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have
been associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑27.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three‐fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if
the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of
the vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts, heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking,
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.
page 5‑7
.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The brakes might not have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot
of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
The vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that
helps prevent a braking skid.
If the vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on the
instrument panel cluster
comes on briefly when the
vehicle is started.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take
longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
When the engine is started, or when the vehicle begins
to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on,
and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more
than even the very best braking.
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing
down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling,
the computer will separately work the brakes at each
front wheel and at both rear wheels.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Your vehicle may have an Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system which combines antilock brake, traction
and stability control systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most
driving conditions.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help the
driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks
to ensure there are no problems. You may hear or feel
the system working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with your vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light will be on solid, and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message will be displayed.
Using ABS
For more information, see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑37.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. A slight brake pedal
pulsation might be felt or some noise might be heard,
but this is normal.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system is
both on and activated.
The ESC/TCS button is
located on the instrument
panel.
You may also feel or hear the system working; this is
normal.
The traction control system can be turned off or back
on by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both
traction control and ESC, press and hold the button
briefly.
When the light is on solid and the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message is displayed, the system
will not assist the driver in maintaining directional
control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44.
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
CONTROL OFF message will appear, and the
ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driver
that both traction control and ESC are disabled.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever you start your vehicle.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But, you can turn
ESC off if you ever need to.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
begins to assist the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control on
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5‑18
.
page 4‑6
.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines
that a problem exists with the system. The SERVICE
STABILITRAK message and the ESC/TCS light will be
on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and
requires service. If the problem does not clear after
restarting the vehicle, you should see your dealer
for service. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑44 for more information.
This light will flash when
the TCS is limiting
wheel spin.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3 for more information.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but
this is normal.
If cruise control is being used when TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. Cruise control may be reengaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 4‑6.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only
if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power and
may also upshift the transmission and apply the
front brakes to limit wheel spin.
The TCS operates in all transmission shift lever
positions. But the system can upshift the transmission
only as high as the shift lever position chosen, so use
the lower gears only when necessary. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 3‑23.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system is on,
this warning light comes
on and stays on if there is
a problem.
To turn the system on
or off, press the Traction
Control button located on
the instrument panel.
A SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message also
appears on the DIC. When this warning light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑44 for more information.
When the system is turned off, the traction control
warning light comes on and TRACTION CONTROL
OFF appears on the DIC. If the traction control system
is limiting wheel spin when the button is pressed to turn
the system off, the warning light comes on and the
system will turn off right away.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, TCS should always be left on. But the
system can be turned off if needed. Turn the system
off if the vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and
rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking Your
Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5‑19 and If Your Vehicle
is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5‑18 for
more information.
Press the Traction Control button again to turn the
system back on. The Traction Control warning light
should go off.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3 for more information.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
Steering
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
These problems can be avoided by braking — if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in
time because there is no room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around the problem.
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes — but, unless the vehicle
has antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels.
See Braking on page 5‑3. It is better to remove as
much speed as possible from a collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending on
the space available.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, it can be
turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches),
about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Skidding
Passing
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
.
Look down the road, to the sides, and to
crossroads for situations that might affect a
successful pass. If in doubt, wait.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double‐solid line on your
side of the lane.
.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
.
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
.
When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Night driving tips include:
.
Drive defensively.
.
Do not drink and drive.
.
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
.
Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light
up so much road ahead.
If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If the
vehicle does not have ABS, then in a braking skid,
where the wheels are no longer rolling, release enough
pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again.
This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal
down steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long
as the wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
.
Watch for animals.
.
When tired, pull off the road.
.
Do not wear sunglasses.
.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
.
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
Driving at Night
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it
has little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep‐standing or
flowing water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
WARNING:
{
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Pass with caution.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal
until the brakes work normally.
.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 6‑52.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
.
Turn off cruise control.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
.
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
.
.
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
.
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
.
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
.
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
.
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
.
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
Hill and Mountain Roads
up-to-date maps?
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in
these conditions include:
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
.
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
You would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always have
the engine running and the vehicle in gear when
going downhill.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that
let you stay in your own lane.
WARNING:
{
.
.
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
(Continued)
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5‑7, it improves the ability to accelerate on
slippery roads, but slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. When driving through deep snow,
turn off the traction control system to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between
the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing
rain begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a
slippery roads, but apply the brakes sooner than
when on dry pavement.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur
on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
WARNING: (Continued)
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
.
.
Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3
.
.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
WARNING:
{
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑29.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
.
Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
(Continued)
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as
little as possible to save fuel.
WARNING:
{
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be injured.
The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5‑19.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6‑73.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction system.
Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may properly carry, the
Tire and Loading Information label and the Vehicle
Certification label.
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes
a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does
not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to
be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑24.
WARNING:
{
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
Tires on page 6‑52 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Tire and Loading Information Label
page 6‑59
.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle,
see “Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver door open,
you will find the label attached below the
door lock post (striker). The Tire and Loading
Information label lists the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The vehicle capacity weight includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory‐installed
options.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Example 1
Description
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity for your vehicle.
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
A
(453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 5‑27 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
A
A
(453 kg)
(453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle's maximum vehicle capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers, and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle's maximum vehicle capacity
weight.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle.
Certification Label
If there is a heavy load, it should be spread out.
WARNING:
{
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is found on
the rear edge of the driver door.
Notice : Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages,
or anything else are put inside the vehicle,
they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you
have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
they will keep going.
WARNING: (Continued)
.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
.
When you carry something inside the
WARNING:
{
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
.
Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
Towing
.
Put things in the cargo area of the
vehicle. In the cargo area, put them
as far forward as you can. Try to spread
the weight evenly.
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer
or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle
must be towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
.
Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
page 8‑7
.
(Continued)
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dinghy Towing
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
.
What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
.
What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long
they can tow.
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
.
Is the proper towing equipment going to be
used? See your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be towed, a
dolly should be used. See “Dolly Towing” that follows for
more information.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5‑14.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
Dolly Towing
5. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer's instructions.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove
the key.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow the vehicle
from the front:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with
the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the
trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the information
in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this
section. Trailering is different than just driving the
vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer
WARNING:
{
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could
be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer for advice and information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for the safety of the driver and
the passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, axles, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating
extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your dealer
for important information about towing a trailer with
the vehicle.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
.
the weight of the trailer,
.
the weight of the trailer tongue
.
There are many different laws, including speed
.
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure the rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you will be driving.
A good source for this information can be
state or provincial police.
and the total weight on the vehicle's tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
1,000 miles (1600 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, transmission or other parts could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment
on the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more information.
.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in
at the heavier loads.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
.
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle's parts.
Ask your dealer for trailering information or advice,
or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6
for more information.
.
Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature
is above 100°F (38°C).
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of
the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it,
and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there
are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must
be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑19 for more information about the vehicle's
maximum load capacity.
Using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑19. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for
the vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer's recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed. Here are
some rules to follow:
Trailer Brakes
Because the vehicle has antilock brakes, do not try to
tap into the vehicle's hydraulic brake system. If you do,
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
.
The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you
will be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
.
Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If there are, then
be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, water,
and deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle. See Engine
Exhaust on page 3‑29 in the Index for more
information.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Get to know the rig before setting out
for the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you
are driving is now longer and not as responsive as
the vehicle is by itself.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand
to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving
and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Parking on Hills
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
WARNING:
{
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on
a flat surface.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers
are seeing the signal when they are not. It is important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Driving on Grades
If parking the rig on a hill:
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than
normal engine and transmission temperatures may
result and damage the vehicle. Frequent stops are
very important to allow the engine and transmission
to cool.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle's speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating. If the engine does overheat, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑29.
5. Release the brake pedal.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
.
start the engine,
on page 6‑29
.
.
shift into a gear, and
.
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
release the parking brake.
If the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer, be
sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the
vehicle before changing the tire.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for
more information. Things that are especially important
in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid,
engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake system. It is
a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, and
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Tire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . 6-94
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories are added
to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance
and safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability
control. Some of these accessories could even
cause malfunction or damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM
Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer and ask
for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑74.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
WARNING:
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many
fluids, and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.
{
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8‑16.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑73.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 7‑14.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect
the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and
can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 6‑93.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be
found at www.toptiergas.com.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the 3.5LV6 engine (VIN Code K) or
the 3.9LV6 engine (VIN Code M), you can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to
85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 6‑8. In all other engines, use only the unleaded
gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, the vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could
turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑31. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
page 6‑6
.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than
87, an audible knocking noise, commonly referred to
as spark knock, might be heard when driving. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. If heavy knocking is heard when
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 6‑6 for additional
information.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every
engine oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment
PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer for service.
Also, your dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit‐related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel
(E85) pump available. The U.S. Department of Energy
has an alternative fuels website (www.eere.energy.gov/
afdc/infrastructure/locator.html) that can help you find
E85 fuel. Those stations that do have E85 should have
a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if
the ethanol content is greater than 85%.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 6‑93.
If the vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K)
or the 3.9LV6 engine (VIN Code M), you can use
either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel on page 6‑5
.
In all other engines, use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Gasoline Octane on page 6‑6.
Only vehicles that have the 3.5L V6 engine
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not
properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank
can improve starting. For good starting and heater
efficiency below 0°C (32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is best not
to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85.
(VIN Code K) or the 3.9LV6 engine (VIN Code M) can
use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the use of
E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanol
in E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from
renewable sources such as corn and other crops.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you
add as much fuel as possible — do not add less than
11 L (three gallons) when refueling. You should drive
the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
11 km (seven miles) to allow the vehicle to adapt
to the change in ethanol concentration.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you
will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using
E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the
Tank on page 6‑10.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with E85
fuel and can harm the vehicle's fuel system. Do not
add anything to E85. Damage caused by additives
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
WARNING:
{
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle. If the vehicle
has E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be yellow and
state that E85 or gasoline can be used. See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 6‑8.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap on the hook
on the inside of the fuel door.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑44 for more information.
WARNING:
{
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
WARNING:
{
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6‑89.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise
until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑31.
page 4‑31
.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING:
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{
WARNING:
{
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
.
Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
WARNING:
{
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling is
complete.
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
.
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
.
Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the interior hood
release handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located to the left of the
parking brake pedal.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood latch, located near the center of
the hood front, by pushing the latch to the right.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.5LV6 engine (3.9LV6 similar), here is what you will see:
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
Engine Oil
page 6‑33
.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 6‑38.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse
Block on page 6‑96.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
on page 6‑39
.
E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
under Cooling System on page 6‑24.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
F. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 6‑24.
G. Power Steering Fluid Cap. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 6‑32.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑15.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑15.
J. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of
View). See “Checking the Fluid Level” under
Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 6‑21.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6‑35.
L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑19.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
When to Add Engine Oil
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑14
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
V6 Engine
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the
dipstick all the way back in when through.
V8 Engine
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind
of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑99.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
.
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
.
Cold Temperature Operation
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil
to Use” for more information.
.
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol
Oils meeting these
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it
can calculate when the next oil change is required.
If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned
on, reset the system.
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine Oil
Life System:
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on.
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44
.
Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving
under the best conditions, the oil life system might not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer has trained service people who will
perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC
for more than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when the vehicle is started, the Engine Oil Life
System has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must
be changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Do with Used Oil
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the driver's side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
for more information on location.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the
following:
2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.
3. Pull out the filter.
1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs through the
hinges on the housing.
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housing to lock
the cover in place.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
WARNING:
{
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not drive with the
air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily
get into the engine, which could damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C
(180°F to 200°F).
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealer service
department.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 24 km
(15 miles) when outside temperatures are above
10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), you may
have to drive longer.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Checking the Fluid Level
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little
fluid could cause the transmission to overheat.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if checking the
transmission fluid.
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the
shift lever in P (Park).
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
.
When outside temperatures are above
32°C (90°F).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
.
At high speed for quite a while.
.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
.
While pulling a trailer.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
The transmission fluid
dipstick handle is the
black loop with this
symbol on it. It is located
near the rear of the
engine compartment.
V6 Engines
Check both sides of the dipstick, and read
the lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
for more information on location.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Fluid
Cooling System
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
3.5L V6 Engine shown, 3.9L Engine similar
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
B. Pressure Cap
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
WARNING:
{
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
WARNING:
{
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
The following explains the cooling system and how
to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑29.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
What to Use
.
WARNING:
{
Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
.
Protects against rust and corrosion.
coolant mixture will. The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11 for more information.
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or
above the COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system
is cool before this is done. See Engine Coolant Engine
Coolant for more information.
WARNING:
{
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
If your vehicle has one of the V6 engines, the coolant
recovery tank is located in the rear of the engine
compartment on the passenger's side of the vehicle.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine, the coolant
recovery tank is located in the rear of the engine
compartment on the driver's side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14.
When the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is at
the COLD FILL line, start the vehicle.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the COLD FILL line on the coolant recovery
tank. To check the coolant level, look for the COLD FILL
line on the side of the coolant recovery tank that faces
the engine. If the level is not correct, there may be a
leak in the cooling system.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the cooling system through the
coolant fill neck on the engine, but be sure the system
is cool before you do it.
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly
to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
WARNING:
{
1. You can remove the
pressure cap when
the cooling system,
including the pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose is no longer
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop. A hiss
means that there is still
some pressure left.
WARNING:
{
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.
3. Fill the cooling system with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, up to the base of
the filler neck. See Engine Coolant on page 6‑25
Engine Coolant for more information about the
proper coolant mixture. Rinse or wipe any spilled
coolant from the engine and the compartment.
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantly low, you
should have a dealer service department inspect the
vehicle for leaks.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
There is a coolant temperature gauge and a
warning light on the instrument panel that indicate
an overheated engine condition. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 4‑30 Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge and Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 4‑30 Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
COLD FILL line.
5. Install the coolant recovery tank cap and the
pressure cap. After a day or two of driving,
when the engine is cold, check the coolant
level in the recovery tank. If it is low, refill it
to the COLD FILL line.
In addition, you will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED
IDLE ENGINE and an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE message displayed on the vehicle's Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑44 DIC Warnings and Messages
for more information.
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
WARNING:
{
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the
engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there
is no sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 6‑32 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 6‑32 for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in
the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too
hot when the vehicle:
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
Also, see "Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode" later in this section.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
.
Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located toward
the rear of the engine
compartment on the
passenger's side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑14 for
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The coolant temperature gauge will
indicate an overheat condition exists. Driving extended
miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat
protection mode should be avoided.
reservoir location.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
page 6‑15
.
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11
Always use the proper fluid.
.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
page 7‑11
.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer's instructions before use.
If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where
the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid
that has sufficient protection against freezing.
The fluid level should be somewhere within the
cross‐hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid is
at the ADD mark, you should add fluid.
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Adding Washer Fluid
.
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer's instructions for
adding water.
A WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when
you need to add windshield washer fluid to your vehicle.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for
more information.
.
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage the washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system. Also, water does
not clean as well as washer fluid.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the tank
is full.
.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
the windshield washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer system and
paint.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
more information on location.
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑14
for the location of the
reservoir.
WARNING:
{
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑27.
.
The brake fluid level goes down because of
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes back up.
.
A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or
later the brakes will not work well.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed
container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11
.
page 6‑89
.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new
pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when
applying the brake pedal firmly.
WARNING:
{
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
WARNING:
{
Notice:
.
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake hydraulic system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake hydraulic system
can damage brake hydraulic system parts
so badly that they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in the wrong kind
of fluid.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake wear warning sound
is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake
parts are installed.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts
in the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑99.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign that brake service might
be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Battery
Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for battery
location.
WARNING:
{
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on page 6‑39 for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
DANGER:
{
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the other vehicle's system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle's battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you do not want. You would
not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad
grounding could damage the electrical systems.
WARNING:
{
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
.
They contain acid that can burn you.
.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by
the warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. And it could save the radio!
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12‐volt
battery with a negative ground system.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle.
WARNING:
{
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+)
jump starting terminal for that purpose. The remote
positive (+) terminal is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger's side of the
vehicle, on the underhood fuse block. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for more
information on location.
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
WARNING:
{
To uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal,
remove the fuse block
cover. You should
always use the remote
positive (+) terminal
Using an open flame near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
instead of the positive (+)
terminal on the battery.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
WARNING:
{
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location of the vehicle with the
good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable
at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move.
The electrical connection is just as good there,
and the chance of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do not
touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the fuse block cover to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 6‑50.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you (for
vertical aim).
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your dealer
for service.
WARNING:
{
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace one of these bulbs:
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑13.
2. Remove the screw from the headlamp assembly.
A. Sidemarker
C. High-Beam
Headlamp
B. Low-Beam Headlamp
D. Parking/Turn
Signal Lamp
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by
raising the lock tab and pulling the connector away
from the bulb's base.
8. Install the electrical connector to the bulb.
9. Install the new bulb by inserting the smallest tab
on the bulb base into the matching notch in the
retaining ring. Turn the bulb a quarter-turn
clockwise until it stops.
10. Reinstall the dust caps.
3. Pull up on the plastic headlamp retainer and
remove it.
4. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle
and remove the electrical connector.
5. Remove the round dust caps to gain access to the
bulbs.
6. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove it
from the retaining ring by pulling it away from the
headlamp.
11. Push the headlamp assembly toward the vehicle.
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Push down on the plastic headlamp retainer to
reinstall it.
13. Reinstall the screw from the headlamp assembly.
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace one of these bulbs:
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
2. Remove the convenience net. Unhook the net from
the upper wing nut.
A. Rear Sidemarker Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
3. Turn the upper wing nut counterclockwise and
remove it.
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal
4. Pull the carpet away from the rear of the vehicle.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it.
8. Pull the old bulb straight out to remove it.
9. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks to
install it.
10. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall it.
11. Push the taillamp assembly back into place.
When reinstalling the taillamp assembly, make
sure that you line up the four posts on the
assembly with the slots in the vehicle.
12. Turn the two hex nuts clockwise to reinstall them.
13. Put the carpet back in place at the rear of the
vehicle.
5. Turn the two hex nuts counterclockwise to
remove them.
6. Pull out the taillamp assembly and disconnect the
wiring harness.
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Turn the lamp assembly counterclockwise and pull
the lamp assembly out of the connector.
2. Pull the old bulb from the lamp assembly, keeping
the bulb straight as you pull it out.
3. Install the new bulb.
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
14. Turn the upper wing nut clockwise to reinstall.
15. Put the convenience net back into place by
hooking it to the upper wing nut.
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here's how to remove the
wiper blade:
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up
Bulb Number
921
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
Front Parking/Turn Signal
License Plate Lamp
Headlamps
3157NAK
194
High-Beam
H9
H11
194
Low-Beam
Sidemarker
Stoplamp, Taillamp, and Turn
Signal
3057
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip up from
the blade connecting point, and pull the blade
assembly down toward the windshield to remove it
from the wiper arm.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and
snap the clip down into place.
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove and replace the wiper blade element do the
following:
1. The wiper blade element has two notches at one
end which are engaged by the bottom claw set of
the wiper blade. At the notched end of the wiper
blade, pull the wiper blade element from the wiper
blade assembly.
2. To replace the element, start at the heel end of
the wiper blade, which is the end nearest to the
base of the wiper arm, and slide the wiper blade
element, notched end last, into the wiper blade
claw sets.
3. To engage the last claw into the notched end of the
wiper blade element, squeeze the wiper blade
element at the notched area, and push the wiper
blade element so the claw fits into the notch.
A. Correct Installation
B. Incorrect Installation
4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notches are
engaged by the last claw set, and that all the other
claws are properly engaged in the slots of the
wiper blade element on both sides.
For the proper type and size windshield wiper blades,
see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7‑12.
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
WARNING: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and
where to obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer.
should be checked when your vehicle's
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑59
.
.
.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
WARNING:
{
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire's tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle's tires have been damaged,
replace them.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
.
Overloading your vehicle's tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
.
Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
(Continued)
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑70
.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑85 and If a Tire
Goes Flat on page 6‑74
.
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
page 6‑59
.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire's width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type, and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary use only.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit number that
indicates the tire height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire's sidewall is 60 percent as high as it
is wide.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to
its width.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
page 6‑59
.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
page 5‑19
.
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks
and multipurpose vehicles.
page 6‑66
.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire's
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59
and Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑70
.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
If your tires have too much air (over‐inflation),
you can get the following:
.
Unusual wear
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
.
Poor handling
.
Rough ride
.
Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle's original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under‐inflation or over‐inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under‐inflation), you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should
be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
Spare Tire on page 6‑85
.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even
when they are under‐inflated. Check the tire's
inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to
a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get
a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure
is low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under‐inflated.
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under‐inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑62 for
additional information.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start‐ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle's tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle's original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle's tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑19, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your
vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑65 and Tires on page 6‑52.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors.
Sensor damage caused by using a tire sealant is
not covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and
the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be
viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑37 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44.
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6‑67
.
.
One of the road tires has been replaced with the
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re‐install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer for service if the
TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
.
The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle's tires or replace one
or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer for
service.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter's lock and unlock buttons at the
same time for approximately five seconds.
The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is
in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
message displays on the DIC screen.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire's
air pressure. If increasing the tire's air pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire's sidewall.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that
the sensor identification code has been matched to
this tire and wheel position.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gauge, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions
the matching process stops and you need to start over.
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times
to indicate the sensor identification code has
been matched to the driver side rear tire, and
the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message
on the DIC display screen goes off.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6‑66 and
Wheel Replacement on page 6‑72
.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle's tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 6‑66 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
When rotating the vehicle's tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
on page 7‑3
.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑59 and Loading the Vehicle on
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
page 5‑19
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑62
.
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑99
.
tread remaining.
WARNING:
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑75
.
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you
need replacement tires, GM strongly recommends
that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires
that are designed to give the same performance
and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the
original tires.
.
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire's rubber.
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all‐season tread design, the TPC
Spec number will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 6‑52 for additional information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they
are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle performing most like
it did when the tires were new. Replacing less
than a full set of tires can affect the braking
and handling performance of your vehicle.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑65
for information on proper tire rotation.
WARNING:
{
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
WARNING:
{
If you must replace your vehicle's tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias‐belted tires)
as your vehicle's original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes, brands, or types
may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the correct size, brand, and
type of tires on all wheels. It is all right to
drive with your compact spare temporarily,
as it was developed for use on your vehicle.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low‐pressure
warning if non‐TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low‐pressure warning that is higher or lower
than the proper warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
See Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑85
.
System on page 6‑60
.
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle's original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19, for
more information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
WARNING:
{
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not recommended
for those wheels are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
See Buying New Tires on page 6‑67 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6‑3 for additional
information.
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal
Safety Requirements In Addition To These
Grades.
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1½) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments
to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be
necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice
unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or
the other, the alignment might need to be checked.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
WARNING:
{
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑75 for more
information.
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
WARNING: (Continued)
WARNING:
{
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer's
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels.
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
Tire Chains
WARNING:
{
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P225/55R17 or P235/50R18 size tires, use tire chains
only where legal and only when you must. Use only
SAE Class S‐type chains that are the proper size for
your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If your vehicle has P225/55R17 or P235/50R18
size tires, do not use tire chains, there is not
enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of your vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
(Continued)
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
WARNING:
{
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle's tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it
for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks (A).
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3
.
WARNING:
{
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
2. Remove the convenience net if the vehicle
has one.
3. Remove the spare tire cover.
6. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.
4. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it.
5. Remove the compact spare tire.
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
This vehicle may have aluminum wheels with exposed
wheel nuts. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the
wheel nuts. Do not remove them yet.
Or, this vehicle may have steel wheels with plastic
covers.
The tools you will need to change a tire include the
jack (A), extension and protection guide (B), and wheel
wrench (C).
To remove the plastic covers and wheel nut caps,
loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench in a
counterclockwise direction. If needed, finish loosening
them with your fingers. The plastic nut caps will not
come off.
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If needed, use the flat end of the wheel wrench and pry
along the edge of the cover until it comes off. The edge
of the wheel cover could be sharp, so do not try to
remove it with your bare hands. Do not drop the cover
or lay it face down, as it could become scratched or
damaged. Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the
flat tire is repaired or replaced.
Once you have removed the wheel cover, use the
following procedure to remove the flat tire and install
the spare tire.
1. Do a safety check before proceeding.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑75.
3. For all wheel types, find the jacking location using
the diagram above and the corresponding jacking
notches located on the bottom side of the plastic
molding. The notches in the plastic molding are
marked with a triangle shape to help you find them.
The front location is about 7.0 inches (17.7 cm)
from the rear edge of the front wheel well. The rear
location is about 4.5 inches (11.4 cm) from the front
edge of the rear wheel well.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise once on
each wheel nut to loosen them. Do not remove
them yet.
4. Put the compact spare tire near you.
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING:
{
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it
for changing a flat tire.
WARNING:
{
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING: (Continued)
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑75
.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground to install the compact spare tire.
6. Remove all wheel nuts and the flat tire.
WARNING:
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
8. Install the compact spare tire.
(Continued)
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
9. Reinstall the wheel
nuts with the rounded
end of the nuts toward
the wheel. Tighten
each nut clockwise by
hand until the wheel is
held against the hub.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
WARNING:
{
sequence as shown.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become
loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be
tightened with a torque wrench to the proper
torque specification after replacing. Follow the
torque specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑99 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑99 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
6-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store a full-size tire:
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
1. Install the tools in their original location in the trunk
area and secure.
2. Place the tire valve stem facing down and the
protector/guide placed through a wheel bolt hole
and threaded onto the bolt screw.
WARNING:
{
3. Remove the protector and attach the retainer
securely
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.
When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, put the
protector back in the foam holder.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as
After the compact spare tire has been installed on the
vehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.
you can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑85
.
Use this as a guide for storing the compact spare tire
and tools.
When storing a full-size tire, use the extension with the
extension protector, located in the foam holder, to help
avoid wheel surface damage.
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Cover
A. Retainer
B. Retainer
B. Full-Size Flat Tire
C. Protective Guide
D. Extension Bolt Screw
E. Wing Nut
C. Compact Spare Tire
D. Wing Nut
E. Jack
F. Wheel Wrench
G. Extension Protector
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw
F. Jack
G. Wheel Wrench
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw
Compact Spare Tire
6-84
Full-Size Flat Tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
repaired or replaced where you want. You must
Compact Spare Tire
WARNING:
calibrate the tire inflation monitor system after installing
or removing the compact spare. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 6‑60. The system may not
work correctly when the compact spare is installed on
the vehicle. Of course, it's best to replace the spare with
a full-size tire as soon as you can. The spare will last
longer and be in good shape in case you need it again.
{
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at
a time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other
parts of the vehicle.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare
tire and its wheel together.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure the
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains
on the compact spare.
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle's interior will continue to look its best
if it is cleaned often. Although not always visible,
dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery.
Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic
surfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommended to
remove particles from the upholstery. It is important
to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining
heavily soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly
as possible. The vehicle's interior may experience
extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle's breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning the vehicle's
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the
vehicle's doors and windows.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle's interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle's
upholstery and clean the vehicle's glass can be
obtained from your dealer.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
6-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
Fabric/Carpet
.
A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any
soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the
soil as possible using one of the following techniques:
from any interior surface.
.
A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
.
Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
.
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper
towel until no more can be removed.
.
Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean:
.
Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
.
Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle's interior.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that
was used with plain water.
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they
can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of the leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle's interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
6-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not
be covered by the warranty.
WARNING:
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer. Follow all manufacturers' directions
regarding correct product usage, necessary safety
precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle
care product.
Weatherstrips
If dirt and/or contaminants build up in the glass
seals, use a cloth and water to clean the glass seals.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather, frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
page 7‑11
.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
6-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
page 6‑89
.
Finish Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal parts.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
6-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could be damaged.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
.
Heat and sun
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
.
Snow and ice, without proper removal
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
6-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on
the vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.
6-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and
replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑99 for the
vehicle's engine code.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label, in the trunk, has the following information:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
6-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Electrical System
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a fuse. If the
motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will
stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by
some electrical problem, have it fixed.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and
the damage would not be covered by the vehicle's
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse
panel protect the power windows and other power
accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the
circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit
until the problem is fixed.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑73 and
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
page 2‑74
.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring checked
right away.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
6-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses
AIRBAG
Usage
Airbags
AMP
Amplifier
AUX
Auxiliary Outlets
Canister
CNSTR
DR/LCK
HTD/SEAT
PWR/MIR
The fuse block is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle in the carpet molding. Remove the fuse block
door to access the fuses.
Door Locks
Heated Seats
Power Mirrors
6-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
PWR/SEAT
PWR/WNDW
RAP
Usage
Power Seats
Power Window
Retained Accessory Power
Sunroof
S/ROOF
TRUNK
Trunk
TRUNK
Trunk Relay
XM™ Radio
XM
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 6‑14 for more information on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
6-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
A/C CMPRSR
ABS MTR 1
ABS MTR 2
AIR PUMP
AIR SOL
Usage
Air Conditioning Compressor
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Motor 1
ABS Motor 2
Fuses
EMISSIONS 2
ETC/ECM
FAN 1
Usage
Emissions 2
Electronic Throttle Control, ECM
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Fuel Pump
Air Pump
FAN 2
Air Injection Reactor Solenoid
FOG LAMPS
FUEL/PUMP
HDLP MDL
HORN
AIRBAG/
DISPLAY
Airbag, Display
Headlamp Module
Horn
AUX PWR
BATT 1
BATT 2
BATT 3
BATT 4
BCM
Auxiliary Power
Battery 1
HTD MIR
INJ 1
Heated Mirror
Injector 1
Battery 2
Battery 3
INJ 2
Injector 2
Battery 4
INT LIGHTS
Interior Lamps
Body Control Module (BCM)
INT LTS/
PNL DIM
Interior Lamps, Instrument Panel
Dimmer
CHMSL/
BCK‐UP
Center High‐Mounted Stoplamp,
Back‐up Lamp
LT HI BEAM
LT LO BEAM
LT PARK
Driver Side High‐Beam Headlamp
Driver Side Low‐Beam Headlamp
Driver Side Parking Lamp
Left Spot
DISPLAY
DRL 1
Display
Daytime Running Lamps 1
Daytime Running Lamps 2
Engine Control Module (ECM), Ignition
DRL 2
LT SPOT
ECM IGN
LT T/SIG
Driver Side Turn Signal Lamp
OnStar®
ECM, Transmission Control
Module (TCM)
ONSTAR
ECM/TCM
PWR DROP/
CRANK
Power Drop, Crank
EMISSIONS 1
Emissions 1
6-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
RADIO
Usage
Relay
A/C CMPRSR
FAN 1
Usage
Air Conditioning Compressor
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 3
Fuel Pump
Audio System
Passenger Side High‐Beam
RT HI BEAM
Headlamp
FAN 2
RT LO BEAM
RT PARK
RT SPOT
RT T/SIG
RVC SEN
STRG WHL
STRTR
Passenger Side Low‐Beam Headlamp
Passenger Side Parking Lamp
Right Spot
FAN 3
FUEL/PUMP
PWR/TRN
REAR DEFOG
STRTR
Powertrain
Passenger Side Turn Signal Lamp
Regulated Voltage Control Sensor
Steering Wheel
Rear Defogger
Starter
Starter
TRANS
Transmission
WPR
Wiper
WSW
Windshield Wiper
6-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in Metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑11 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Automatic Transmission (Bottom Pan Removal)
Cooling System Including Reservoir
3.5L V6, 3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
Engine Oil with Filter
7.0 L
9.6 L
3.8 L
7.4 qt
10.1 qt
4.0 qt
3.5L V6, 3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
Fuel Tank
3.5L V6 Engine (with NU6 emissions)
3.5L V6 Engine (without NU6 emissions)
3.9L V6 Engine
64.4 L
66.2 L
17.0 gal
17.5 gal
17.5 gal
100 lb ft
66.2 L
Wheel Nut Torque
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
6-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
1.01 mm (0.040 in )
1.01 mm (0.040 in )
3.5L V6
N
K
3.5L Flexible Fuel V6
3.9L Flexible Fuel V6
Automatic
M
Automatic
6-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
Maintenance Schedule
.
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19.
Introduction
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6‑6
.
As the vehicle owner, you are responsible for the
scheduled maintenance in this section. We recommend
having your dealer perform these services. Proper
vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good
working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces
vehicle emissions for better air quality.
WARNING:
{
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, see your dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6‑4.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At your dealer, you can be certain that you will receive
the highest level of service available. Your dealer has
specially trained service technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as, up to date tools and
equipment to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil Soon
Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15. An Emission Control Service.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7‑11 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 7‑12. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
service is required for the vehicle as soon as possible,
within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the
best conditions, the engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service for more than
a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer has trained service technicians who will
perform this work and reset the system. If the engine
oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service.
Reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service
for new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6‑65.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑59
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message
displays, certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. The services described for Maintenance I
should be performed at every engine oil change.
The services described for Maintenance II should
be performed when:
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑65.
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑65
.
.
Maintenance I was performed the last time the
Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.
engine oil was changed.
.
It has been 10 months or more since the Change
Engine Oil Soon message has displayed or since
the last service.
.
.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only). See Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter on page 6‑19.
Maintenance I
Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
.
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15. An Emission Control Service.
.
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑25
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑33.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders,
folding seat hardware, and rear compartment
hinges lubrication. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 7‑11. More frequent
lubrication may be required when vehicle is
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth makes them last longer, seal better, and
not stick or squeak.
Maintenance II
.
Perform all services described in Maintenance I.
.
Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear.
.
Engine cooling system inspection. Visual
inspection of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps
and replacement, if needed.
.
.
Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2‑75.
.
Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning, if contaminated.
See Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 6‑91
Worn or damaged wiper blade replacement.
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
Automatic transmission fluid level check and
adding fluid, if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6‑21.
.
.
.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑19.
page 6‑50
.
Passenger compartment air filter replacement
(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). More
frequent replacement may be required if vehicle is
driven regularly under dusty conditions.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7‑9
.
.
.
Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7‑9.
.
Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑25
.
Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on
.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check.
page 6‑24
.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑33.
.
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat shields
inspection for loose or damaged components.
Once a Month
.
Throttle system inspection for interference, binding
or for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have
high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate
accelerator or cruise control cables.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑59
.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑65.
Once a Year
.
Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑9.
.
Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑9.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.
.
Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
Automatic transmission fluid change (normal
service). See Automatic Transmission Fluid on
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
page 6‑21
.
.
Spark plug replacement and spark plug wires
inspection. An Emission Control Service.
.
Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑19.
.
Automatic transmission fluid change (severe
service) for vehicles mainly driven in heavy city
traffic in hot weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used
for taxi, police, or delivery service. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6‑21.
first). See Engine Coolant on page 6‑25
.
An Emission Control Service.
.
Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
Engine coolant level check.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windshield washer fluid level check.
Tire inflation pressures check.
Tire wear inspection.
Rotate tires.
Fluids visual leak check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
Brake system inspection.
Steering and suspension inspection.
Engine cooling system inspection.
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
Body components lubrication.
Restraint system components check.
Automatic transmission fluid level check.
Passenger compartment air filter replacement.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑26.
on page 3‑26
.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
.
To check the parking brake's holding ability:
.
The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when
With the engine running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
by the parking brake only.
the shift lever is in P (Park).
.
The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
.
To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding
Contact your dealer if service is required.
ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
Contact your dealer if service is required.
WARNING:
{
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and
Release Pawl
Engine Oil
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
To determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil
Category LB or GC-LB.
on page 6‑15
.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood and Door
Hinges
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
Engine Coolant
Weatherstrip Lubricant
page 6‑25
.
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
in Canada 89021320).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Hydraulic Brake
System
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Power Steering
System
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
10350737
A2962C
3.5L V6, 3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
19210285
15284938
PF61
CF132
3.5L V6, 3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
Wiper Blades
12591131
41-100
Driver ‐ 21.7 in (55.0 cm)
15941731
15941732
—
—
Passenger ‐ 21.7 in (55.0 cm)
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.5L V6 and 3.9 V6 Engines
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . 8-16
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . 8-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors
of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer's sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument
panel and visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or
parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership
or the general manager.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to
this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a
court action, use of the program is free of charge and
your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you
do not agree with the decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to
be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/
Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada
Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner
disputes involving factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for the review of the
facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed
in about 70 days. We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
.
Digital owner manual, warranty information,
.
and more
My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
.
Online service and maintenance records
.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
.
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
.
My Driveway: Access quick links to parts
.
and service estimates, check trade-in values,
or schedule a service appointment by adding
the vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
Other Helpful Links:
.
My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
.
FAQ
.
Contact Us
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at
its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can
dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
Roadside Assistance Program
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1‐800‐CHEV‐USA
(1‐800‐243‐8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1‐888‐889‐2438).
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your
vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too
often, or the same type of claim is made many times.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
.
Your name, home address, and home telephone
Services Provided
number
.
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough
Telephone number of your location
fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service
station.
.
Location of the vehicle
.
Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service is provided to unlock
vehicle
the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock
may be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
.
Description of the problem
.
Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer
for warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a
crash and cannot be driven. Assistance is also
given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud,
or snow.
100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change
a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire,
if equipped, must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility
for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is
not covered by the warranty.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 km from where your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how
to receive payment.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
.
.
.
Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
Legal fines.
Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
.
.
Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is
required.
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a limit of six requests per year. Additional
travel information is also available. Allow
three weeks for delivery.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling
a service appointment and advising your service
consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer
can help minimize your inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/
retailer, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing
several transportation options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of
the following:
If the dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation Program
Shuttle Service
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and
Canada.
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination
with minimal interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one‐way or round trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance parameters of
the dealer's area.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental
vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer's
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental
vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an
overnight warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will
be limited and must be supported by original receipts.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known. Such
parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle's resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM
New Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer may have a collision repair
center with GM-trained technicians and state of the art
equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle's
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be
repaired with GM original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
.
Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
.
If there has been an injury, call emergency
services for help. Do not leave the scene of a
crash until all matters have been taken care of.
Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in
danger or you are instructed to move it by a police
officer.
.
Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end
of your lease for poor quality repairs.
.
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑7 for more information.
.
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver's name,
the service's name, and the phone number.
.
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you keep
these items in your vehicle.
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver's license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance
company and policy number, and a general
description of the damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
.
If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states/
provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a report
may not be necessary. This is especially true
if there are no injuries and both vehicles are
driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not
pay the full cost.
.
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer or a private
collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure
you are comfortable with them. Remember, you
will have to feel comfortable with their work for a
long time.
If another party's insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
.
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
Reporting Safety Defects
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Administrator, NHTSA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors
of Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Bulletins
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an
order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
For Credit Card Orders Only
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in
a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help your dealer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules may
also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as
radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
.
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
.
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;
in response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
.
How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation System
Radio Frequency Statement
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking
and starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other GM
system containing personal information.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
8-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
A
Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Antenna
Backglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . 4-88
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Appearance Care
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Airbag
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Airbag System
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . 2-66
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
i - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appearance Care (cont.)
B
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Automatic Transmission
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Brake
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
i - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Check
Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Child Restraints
Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Care of
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
CD, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
i - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Coolant
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Engine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Engine Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . 8-16
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
i - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
DIC Vehicle Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Driving
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Before a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
In Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
DIC Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Disc, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Door
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
i - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
E
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Overheated Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
EDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Electrical System
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . . . 6-94
Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
i - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel (cont.)
F
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Flat Tire, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
G
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Gasoline
Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
i - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Headlamps
I
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Instrument Panel
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System (ITBC) . . . . 5-27
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
i - 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
K
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Electronic StabiliTrak Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Highbeam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Lamps
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
LATCH System for Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Lighting
Delayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
i - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks
Mirrors
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Lumbar
Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
N
Navigation System, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Manual Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
M
O
Maintenance Schedule
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Off-Road
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Manual Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Map Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Message
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Operation, Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . 3-33
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
i - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlets
Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . .6-4
Phone
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Outside
Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . 6-32
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Owners, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Program
P
Paint, Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Parking
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
i - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Replacement Parts
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Roof
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Radios
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
i - 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint
S
Center Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Security
Safety Belts
Care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Safety Belts Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Seats
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle . . . 6-5
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Shifting
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Spare Tire
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
i - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
StabiliTrak Control Indicator Light, Electronic . . . . . . 4-29
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Storage Areas
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Sunglasses Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, and
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Time, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
i - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Installing the Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Removing the Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Towing
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Control System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Transmission
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
V
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Ventilation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Transmission Operation, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
i - 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield
W
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Where to Put the Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
X
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
i - 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|